Home

Supermicro AOC-IBH-002

Contents

1. 2 2 2 3 Electrostatic Discharge Precautions ee ee ee se ek Ke ek Ke ke 2 2 2 4 Operating Precautions 2 2 Chapter 3 Setup and Installation 3 1 3 1 Installing Removing a Switch Module se see ee Ee Ee RR 3 1 Installing a Switch Module iese se Re ee Re ee Re ee ge 3 1 Removing a Switch Module iese ee Re ee Re ee Re Re ee ee 3 3 3 2 Configuring the Switch Module ee se ek ee RR Re Ge ER RR 3 4 Web based Management Utility IPMI onnninnnnnininnnnininiccnnacaninininns 3 5 Network Gonnection currar is 3 5 Address Defaults sccitc EE SIES ER EL al aS 3 7 Command Wines tes ces cede atest it rete 3 8 3 3 SBM GEM X2C 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Firmware 3 9 Firmware Upgrading Procedures ee ee eek ER ER RE ER ER EER EER ER eke ee ee 3 9 Firmware Failure Recovery StepS ees ese ee ee ee Re ee Re ee ee 3 12 Chapter 4 InfiniBand Modules 4 1 de EE EE te da 4 1 4 2 SBM IBS 001 4X DDR InfiniBand Switch Module 4 2 4 3 SBM IBS Q3618 Q3616 4X QDR InfiniBand Switch Module 4 3 4 4 SBM IBS Q3616M 4X QDR InfiniBand Switch Module 4 4 4 5 SBM IBP D14 InfiniBand Pass Through Module 4 6 4 6 Installation and Configuration of InfiniBand Switch Modules 4 6 Installing Removing the
2. 7 158 Table 7 113 RRD OSPF Configuration Page Parameters iese esse esse 7 159 Table 7 114 RRD6 Filter Configuration Page Parameters 7 161 Table 7 115 RRD6 OSPFv3 Configuration Page Parameters sesse 7 162 Table 7 116 RRD RIPv6 Configuration Page Parameters iese esse esse 7 163 Table 7 117 VRRP Settings Page Parameters esse sees ee ee ee ee 7 165 Table 7 118 IGMP Snooping Configuration Page Parameters sesse 7 167 Table 7 119 IGMP Snooping Timer Configuration Page Parameters 7 168 Table 7 120 IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration Page Parameters 7 169 Table 7 121 IGMP Snooping VLAN Router Ports Page Parameters 7 171 Table 7 122 MAC Based Multicast Forwarding Table Page Parameters 7 171 Table 7 123 Dynamic Multicast Port Configuration Page Parameters 7 173 Table 7 124 IGMP Interface Configuration Page Parameters sesse 7 175 List of Tables Table 7 125 Table 7 126 Table 7 127 Table 7 128 Table 7 129 Table 7 130 Table 7 131 Table 7 132 Table 7 133 Table 7 134 Table 7 135 Table 7 136 Table 7 137 Table 7 138 Table 7 139 Table 7 140 Table 7 141 Table 7 142 Table 7 143 Table 7 144 Table 7 145 Table 7 146 Table 7 147 Table 7 148 Table 7 149 Table 7 150 Table 7 151 Table 7 152 Table 7 153 Table 7 154 Table 7 155 Table 7 156 Table 7 157 Table 7 158 Table 7 159 Table 7 160 Table 7 161 Table
3. 4 If you want to remove this VLAN click on the REMOVE THIS VLAN button Click on DISPLAY ALL VLAN to list all of current VLAN configuration 5 To change the port member state or remove a VLAN select the VLAN either from the VLAN ID drop down menu or by clicking on the VLAN ID in the table in Figure 6 8 This screen shows the current member state of the selected VLAN Users can modify the port member state apply a change or remove the VLAN 6 5 Trunking Trunking aggregates multiple physical ports link into a single trunk to provide a single logical high speed pipeline link This is useful for switch to switch switch to server and switch to router applications The SuperMicro Gigabit Ethernet switch supports static type link aggregations It uses a distribution algorithm to balance traffic between trunk members This aggregates the bandwidth of the trunk The switch considers a trunk as a single port entity regardless of the trunk composition The switch supports up to four separate trunks Each trunk consists of 2 to 8 ports A port in one trunk cannot simultaneously be in another trunk Link aggregation is supported only on point to point links with the MAC operating in full duplex mode All links in a trunk must operate at the same data rate The links within a trunk should have an equal amount of traffic to achieve maximum efficiency in a multiple link trunk Thus some sort of load balancing among the links ina trunk is
4. Spanning Tree 802 1x IGMP Snooping Cable Diagnostic Password All numbers shown are numbers of packets Logout le 2 el lelelelelelelelelelele olelelelelelelelelels ja ololelelelelelelele a nm o o Port Statistics The PORT STATISTICS screen Figure 6 7 displays detailed traffic statistics for each port to help a user analyze network operations such as traffic bytes errors number of packets etc These traffic statistics are shown in Table 6 3 6 7 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Figure 6 7 Port Statistics Screen BMB GEM 003 F St s System Port Statistics Octets a8 384 UnicastPkts 0 VLAN EF NonUnicastPkts 7568 Piscards 0 Trunking Mirror QoS Rate NonUnicastPkts Errors L2 Management Spanning Tree Summary Lore onkvents 0 nkonwmProtos Mt TotalRxMutticastPkts 15 TotalRxBrodcastPkts ME TT hundrsioPs 0 Rroversets MENT rurragments o Robes EE rscoisions o FecRcnimEr Track Total Octets Rx 8170 Total Pkts Rx Pot 64 Bytes Rx Pkts 12 65 127 Bytes Rx Pkts 128 255 Bytes Rx Pkts 0 256 511 Bytes Rx Pkts 17 Logout 512 1023 Bytes Rx Pkts 0 1024 1518 Bytes Rx Pkts 1519 9216 Bytes Rx Pkts 0 1519 9216 Bytes Tx Pkts Table 6 3 Port Statistics Screen Controls TX Displays traffic information on outgoing frames UnicastPkts This indicates transmitted u
5. 7 151 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Route Aggregations Figure 7 133 BGP Route Aggregation Configuration Page 1 Pret te BGP Route Aggregation Configuration Clicking the ROUTE AGGR tab brings up the BGP ROUTE AGGREGATION CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 133 which is used to aggregate and configure the routes advertised by BGP The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 107 Table 7 107 BGP Route Aggregation Configuration Page Parameters ID a This parameter specifies the index to this table z This parameter in combination with the IP Prefix decides the aggregated IP Address Prefix Length route to be distributed by this switch Status This parameter specifies the status of the entry 7 152 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Advanced BGP Configuration Figure 7 134 Advanced BGP Configuration Page Advanced BGP Configuration EC Em EN E pa as Le Disabled g Clicking the ADVANCED tab brings up the ADVANCED BGP CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 134 which configures dampening and confederation parameters The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 108 Table 7 108 Advanced BGP Configuration Page Parameters This parameter configures the Route Reflector to support route reflection to client peers By default the Route Reflector will reflect routes learnt from a client peer to all other client peers If required the administrator can disabl
6. 7 39 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 23 SNMP Trap Settings Page Parameters Notify Name NOTIFY NAME is a unique identifier associated with the entry The type of notification of the SNMP Trap Settings can be configured as Mealy Type Trap or Inform SNMP AgentX Figure 7 34 SNMP AgentX Subagent Settings Page Clicking the AGENTX link brings up the SNMP AGENTX SUBAGENT SETTINGS page Figure 7 34 which allows you to configure SNMP Agentx sub agent parameters The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 24 Table 7 24 SNMP AgentX Subagent Settings Page Parameters Transport Domain This parameter allows you to specify the TCP 7 40 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 24 SNMP AgentX Subagent Settings Page Parameters Continued Parameter Description Master IP Address This parameter specifies the Master Agent IP address Master Port No This parameter specifies the Master Port number 7 41 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual RMON The following pages can be used to set RMON Remote Monitoring features and settings RMON Basic Settings on page 7 42 Event Configuration on page 7 43 RMON Alarm Configuration on page 7 44 Ethernet Statistics Configuration on page 7 45 e History Control Configuration on page 7 46 RMON Basic Settings Figure 7 35 RMON Basic Settings Page RMON Basic Settings Cl
7. IGMP Timer Parameters Robustness Variable Note Query Interval Query Response Interval a Caras z Robustness Variable Last Member Query Interval Query Interval panning Tree Query Response Interval 802 1x Lant ate ee Group Membership Interval 690 seconds Cable Diagnostic O Enable IGMP Snooping Feature Password Logout Router Ports Click the checkbox under each port to assign router ports 1 AE ARE LS MIA Ma DE IE AE aOoaOOAOOADAOADANORAROI 10 6 29 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 6 8 IGMP Snooping Screen Controls Control Description This allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet If a subnet is expected to be lossy the Robustness Variable may be increased IGMP is robust to Robustness Variable 1 packet losses The Robustness Variable must not be 0 and should not be 1 The default value is 2 Robustness Variable This is the interval between general queries sent by the querier The default interval is 125 seconds By varying the Query Interval an administrator may Query Interval tune the number of IGMP messages on the subnet larger values cause IGMP queries to be sent less often This is the maximum response time inserted into the periodic general queries The default value is 100 10 seconds By varying the query response interval an Query
8. Static RP Address This parameter represents the IP address of the candidate RP 7 183 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual DVMRP The DVMRP page allows you to configure the DVMRP protocol using the following pages DVMRP Basic Settings on page 7 184 Interfaces on page 7 185 DVMRP Basic Settings Figure 7 164 DVMRP Basic Settings Page DVMRP Basic Settings Note To enable DVMRP IGMP Proxy should be disabled Clicking the BASIC SETTINGS tab brings up the DVMRP BASIC SETTINGS page Figure 7 164 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 133 Table 7 133 DVMRP Basic Settings Page Parameters DVMRP Status DVMRP can be enabled or disabled in the switch using this field 7 184 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Interfaces Figure 7 165 DVMRP Interface Settings Page DVMRP Interface Settings viani gt Enable selecinartaceliP Addresduerc Clicking the INTERFACES tab brings up the DVMRP INTERFACE SETTINGS page Figure 7 165 which displays the various parameters XXXXXX The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 134 Table 7 134 DVMRP Interface Settings Page Parameters Interface si This parameter specifies the Interface Index This parameter specifies the distance metric for this interface which is Metric used to calculate distance vectors 7 185 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 7 8 Statistics
9. Table 7 140 SNMP Statistics Page Parameters Continued Parameter SNMP Packet Output SNMP Too Big Errors SNMP No Such Name Errors SNMP Bad Value Errors SNMP General Errors SNMP Trap PDU s SNMP Manager Role Output Packets SNMP Inform Responses Received SNMP Inform Request Generated SNMP Inform Messages Dropped SNMP Inform Requests awaiting Acknowledgement Description This parameter specifies the number of SNMP packets output This parameter specifies the number of SNMP Too Big errors This parameter specifies the number of SNMP No Such Name errors This parameter specifies the number of SNMP Bad Value errors This parameter specifies the number of SNMP General errors This parameter specifies the number of SNMP Trap PDU s This parameter specifies the number of SNMP Manager Role Output packets This parameter specifies the number of SNMP Inform responses received This parameter specifies the number of SNMP Inform requests generated This parameter specifies the number of SNMP Inform messages dropped This parameter specifies the number of SNMP Inform requests awaiting acknowledgement SNMP AgentX Clicking the AGENTX link brings up the AGENTX SUBAGENT STATISTICS page not shown which displays Agentx Subagent information The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 141 Table 7 141 Agentx Subagent Statistics Page Parameters Parameter Transmit Statistics Transmitte
10. Port Statistics New VLAN ID 2 4094 2 Trunking Al 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 YOO lvl MM 111111111111 Click the icon under each port to change member state To change state of all ports click the icon under All L2 Management Spanning Tree Not member Treo egress packets u Untag egress packets 802 1x IGMP Snooping J Cable Diagnostic 2 Assign a new VLAN ID then click on the icon under each port to change the member state There are three states to choose from untag egress packets tag egress packets and not member of a VLAN 6 12 Chapter 6 1 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware 3 Click on the CREATE button to create the new VLAN A new VLAN is shown in Figure 6 10 Figure 6 10 New VLAN Screen XA 1003 BVVVWVIIVIIVIIVVIVWVIVWVV2 UPERMICRO vwsssssaaaaaasasaaasaaaaaa Link BSSVIVVIVIVIVIVVIVIVV2 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 a E IEEE 802 1Q VLAN VLAN ID 2 Remove This VLAN Display All VLAN All 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 ul Ulului jul Ed Click the icon under each port to change member state To change state of all ports click the icon under All L2 Management Spanning Tree __ Not member Li Tag egress packets u Untag egress packets 802 1x IGMP Snooping Cable Diagnostic
11. Port Channel Interface Basic Settings Page 7 95 LA Port Channel Settings Page 7 96 LA Port Settings Page iese ee ee ee Re ee ee Re ee ee 7 97 LA Port State Machine Information Page iese ses ee ee ee 7 98 Figure 7 86 LA Load Balancing Policy Page 7 99 Figure 7 87 802 1x Basic Settings Page 7 100 Figure 7 88 802 1x Port Settings Page 7 101 Figure 7 89 802 1x Timer Configuration Page 7 103 Figure 7 90 Local Authentication Server Configuration Page 7 104 Figure 7 91 MAC Session Info Page 7 105 Figure 7 92 L2 Unicast Filter Configuration Page 7 106 Figure 7 93 L2 Multicast Filter Configuration Page 7 107 Figure 7 94 Layer3 Management Page ees ees ee ee ee ee ee Re ee 7 108 Figure 7 95 VLAN Interface Basic Settings Page iese ese ee ee ee 7 109 Figure 7 96 IPv4 Interface Settings Page sesse dee ee ee ee ee ee Re ee 7 110 Figure 7 97 IP Route Configuration Page 7 111 Figure 7 98 LoopBack Basic Settings Page 7 112 Figure 7 99 IP6 Route Configuration Page 7 113 Figure 7 100 IPv6 Interface Settings Page 7 114 Figure 7 101 ND Cache Configuration Page i sees ee ee ee Re Re 7 115 Figure 7 102 Address Settings Page 7 116 Figure 7 103 Address Profile Settings Page 7 117 Figure 7 104 Prefix Configuration Page 7 118 Figure 7 105 DHCP Basic Settings Page esse ese ees ee ee ee ee ee ee 7 119 Figure 7 106 DHCP Pool Settings Page 7 120 Figure 7
12. sso CSN NET N Fe Interface Settings Area Interface Transit trans Neighbour Neighbour Probe Demand Probe Type Delay rval Interva roced Probing Re t Limi Interval Priority Clicking the INTERFACE tab brings up the INTERFACE SETTINGS page Figure 7 125 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 99 7 141 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 99 Interface Settings Page Parameters VLAN Tunnel Identifier Interface Type Transit Delay Hello Interval Poll Interval Metric Value Neighbour Probe Retransmit Limit This parameter specifies the IPv6 interface over which OSPFv3 is enabled This parameter specifies the type of OSPFv3 interface broadcast noma pointToPoint and pointToMultipoint This parameter indicates the estimated number of seconds to transmit a link state update packet over the interface This parameter indicates the length of time in seconds between the Hello packets that the router sends on the interface This parameter denotes the larger time interval in seconds between the Hello packets sent to an inactive non broadcast multi access neighbor This parameter specifies the metric assigned to this interface This parameter indicates the number of consecutive LSA retransmissions before the neighbor is deemed inactive and the neighbor adjacency is brought down 7 142 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware
13. 7 67 VLAN Traffic Class Mapping Page esse sesse ese ee ee ee 7 68 Port Control Page si ie Es Ee Erg ein een eee 7 69 Rate Limiting Page ese ee ee Re Re ee ee ee Re ee 7 70 VLAN Basic Settings Page ee ese see ke ee Re Re ge ee 7 71 VLAN Port Settings Page eise see see see ke ee Re Re ge ee de 7 72 Static VLAN Configuration Page 7 73 VLAN Protocol Group Settings Page 7 74 VLAN Port MAC Map Settings Page esse see ee ee ee ee ee 7 75 VLAN Unicast MAC Settings Page 7 76 Wildcard Settings Page ees ee ee Re ee Re ER Re ee ke 7 77 SwitchPort Vlan Filtering Page ees ees eke ee ee Re ee Re RA ee 7 78 Dynamic VLAN Global Configuration Page iese sesse ee ee 7 79 Dynamic VLAN Port Configuration Page 7 80 Garp Timers Configuration Page 7 81 Global Configuration Page 7 82 RSTP Configuration Page iese ee ee ee Re ee ee ke 7 83 Port Status Configuration Page 7 84 RSTP Port Status Page 7 85 Global Configuration Page 7 86 Timers Configuration Page 7 88 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Figure 7 77 Figure 7 78 Figure 7 79 Figure 7 80 Figure 7 81 Figure 7 82 Figure 7 83 Figure 7 84 Figure 7 85 CIST Settings Page 7 89 VLAN Mapping Page iese ese see ee ee ee ee Re ee ee ee 7 90 PortSetlings Pade saz ii ERK iii 7 91 MSTP CIST Port Status Page ees se ee ee ee ee Re ee ke 7 92 LA Basic Settings Page ese ee ee Re Re RA Re Re ee 7 94
14. Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware This chapter is provided to help you quickly get started in using the firmware for your SBM GEM X2C 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet switch module using the web based management GUI tool NOTE The 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet switch module is available in two versions f SBM GEM X2C which supports 10 or 14 blade enclosure systems SBM GEM X2C which supports twin blade 20 blade systems r Except for the the maximum number of blades supported these two products are identical The SBM GEM X2C part number is therefore used throughout the rest of this manual to refer to features and operational characteristics of both versions NOTE See the SM CLI Guide included on your SuperBlade Switch System CD ROM for further information on the 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet switch firmware and its controls using the CLI 7 1 Overview The Supermicro switch utility for the 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet switch modules provides a web based interface for managing layer2 and layer3 switching at wire speed for constructing a switched routed network This interface provides both a bridging functionality and advanced features such as link aggregation Dynamic VLAN Dynamic Multicast IGMP Snooping and Network Access Control This web based interface also comes with several Layer3 features as well such as wire speed routing Differentiated services multicast routing and so on The Supermicro Switch firmware is implemented usin
15. Ex0B 0 0 1 1 2 2 h Apply Clicking the TRAFFIC CLASS tab brings up the VLAN TRAFFIC CLASS MAPPING page Figure 7 57 which allows you to map a priority to a traffic class The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 40 Table 7 40 VLAN Traffic Class Mapping Page Parameters Parameter Description Port This displays the port number Priority 0 This parameter chooses any traffic class 0 to 7 to map with priority 0 Priority 1 This parameter chooses any traffic class 0 to 7 to map with priority 1 Priority 2 This parameter chooses any traffic class 0 to 7 to map with priority 2 Priority 3 This parameter chooses any traffic class 0 to 7 to map with priority 3 Priority 4 This parameter chooses any traffic class 0 to 7 to map with priority 4 Priority 5 This parameter chooses any traffic class 0 to 7 to map with priority 5 Priority 6 This parameter chooses any traffic class 0 to 7 to map with priority 6 Priority 7 This parameter chooses any traffic class 0 to 7 to map with priority 7 7 68 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Port Control SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM X2C Figure 7 58 Port Control Page Refresh Support Help About Log Out 675 D TETTETETT sus METIER NE N EEN Home System Mgmt System Settings File Management Firmware Upgrade Management Secunty ACL Web Settings SNMP VLAN Dynamic VLAN RSTP MSTP La 802 1 ers Layer3 Mgmt g
16. Figure 7 166 Statistics Home Page Welcome to the Statistics Page The Statistics of the various layer2 layer3 protocols and other information of the Supermicro switch can be viewed through the links available in this Interface display interface statistics le Radius display Radius statistics TACACS Server display TACACS statistics RMON display RMON statistics SNMP AGENT display SNMP AGENT statistics SNMP AGENTX display SNMP AGENTX statistics VLAN display VLAN statistics RSTP display RSTP statistics MSTP display MSTP statistics Ta LA The STATISTICS HOME page Figure 7 166 contains links to all statistical information for all switch features 7 186 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Interface The Interface link allows you to configure the following pages e Interface Statistics on page 7 187 e Ethernet Statistics on page 7 188 Interface Statistics SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM X2C Figure 7 167 Interface Statistics Page Home gt System Mgmt gt Layer2 Mgmt gt Layer3 Mgmt Interface Statistics Gi0 1 Ex0 3 Reset Stanstcs a a SE Mbps Second Octets Nunicast Discards Errors Unknown Un ast Discards Etrors Packets Protocols Pa ots Gi0 1 1500 1000 0 0 0 o o 0 o 0 0 o o G02 1500 1000 o o o 0 o o o o o o o G03 1500 1000 o o 0 o o o o 0 o CN G04 1500 1000 o o 0 o o o o o o o o Gi0 S 1500 1000 o 0 0 o 0 0 o 0 0 o o G06 1500 1000
17. Console Log This parameter allows you to enable or disable logging to the console 7 24 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 9 Syslog Configuration Page Parameters Continued This parameter helps you to select a particular trap type The following Traps types of traps are supported ALERTS CRITICIAL DEBUGGING EMERGENCIES ERROR INFORMATIONAL NOTIFICATION and WARNINGS Syslog Mail Configuration Figure 7 20 Syslog Mail Configuration Page Syslog Configuration pp ee pe App Clicking the MAIL tab brings up the SYSLOG MAIL CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 20 which allows you to configure the mail server and mail addresses for the syslog feature The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 10 Table 7 10 Syslog Mail Configuration Page Parameters This parameter specifies the IP address of the mail server Make sure the MailServer IP Address mail server is reachable Receiver Email ID This parameter specifies the receipent Email address for Syslog Emails 7 25 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual ACL The ACL link allows you to configure the Access Control List for the switch You can configure ACL on the following three pages MAC Based ACL on page 7 26 IP Standard ACL on page 7 27 IP Extended ACL on page 7 28 MAC Based ACL Figure 7 21 MAC ACL Configuration Page MAC ACL Configuration Clicking the Mac ACL tab brings up th
18. Figure 7 44 Figure 7 45 Figure 7 46 Figure 7 47 Figure 7 48 Figure 7 49 Figure 7 50 Figure 7 51 Figure 7 52 Figure 7 53 Figure 7 54 Figure 7 55 Figure 7 56 Figure 7 57 Figure 7 58 Figure 7 59 Figure 7 60 Figure 7 61 Figure 7 62 Figure 7 63 Figure 7 64 Figure 7 65 Figure 7 66 Figure 7 67 Figure 7 68 Figure 7 69 Figure 7 70 Figure 7 71 Figure 7 72 Figure 7 73 Figure 7 74 Figure 7 75 Figure 7 76 RMON Alarm Configuration Page 7 44 Ethernet Statistics Configuration Page 7 45 History Control Configuration Page esse ee ke ee ee ee 7 46 QOS Basic Settings Page 7 47 QOS Classmap Settings Page ee ee ee Re Ee GR Re ee 7 48 QOS Policymap Settings Page 7 49 COSQ Scheduling Algorithm Settings Page 7 50 COSQ Weight and Bandwidth Configurations Page 7 51 NTP Settings Page EE EES RES Koek GREG ner ee eke ed 7 52 Configuring CX4 Cable Length 7 54 Switch Diagram se AR KERR SEE EDE ner Wee Ka oieta GE Ke ste 7 56 Stack Configuration Page 7 58 Stack Details Page Ed ea ER SES GEEN nent mir mind hein 7 59 Stack Link Status Page is ie SEER eine 7 60 Stack Counter Details Page 7 61 System Settings Page Reload 7 62 Layer2 Management Page ee ee ee ee Re ee ee Re ee 7 63 MAC Address Table Settings Page iese see ese ek ee Re ee 7 64 Port Basic Settings Page 7 65 Port Monitoring Page
19. SBM GEM X2C switch are connected with CMM Ethernet ports internally If you prefer to manage the SBM GEM X2C switch through front panel ports or through any other switching ports then you can assign the desired management IP address to VLAN 1 Alternatively you can create any VLAN and manage the switch through switching ports Here the term switching ports refer to all internal and external 1G and 10G ports of the switch Nomenclature The following nomenclature applies to screens found in this chapter e Port This indicates the stacking ID number port number Port Number GB This is for an internal port Port Number Ext This is for an external port 7 2 Login Figure 7 1 Login Page The initial login page Figure 7 1 is used to login to the Supermicro Switch web based management utility for 10 Gbps switches To login enter your User Name and Password in the fields provided and press the LOGIN button Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware This User Name and Password are both used for accessing the switch through the web for switch configuration The entered user name and password are validated at the switch end After logging in you will be taken to the HOME page of the utility See Section 7 3 Home Page on page 7 3 for further details 7 3 Home Page The HOME page Figure 7 2 contains links and menus for going to all other control pages in the Supermicro Switch web based interfac
20. Superblade Network Modules User s Manual RMON Ethernet Statistics Figure 7 171 RMON Ethernet Statistics Page Refresh Support Help About Log Out SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM X2C SMIS RMON Ethernet Statistics Home gt System Mgmt x 7 Layer2 Mgmt der Era collisions gt Layer3 Mgmt ts ts v Multicast IGMP Snooping Dynamic Multicast IGMP PIM DVM RP Statistics Interface Radius IGMP Snooping IGMP PIM DVMAP Clicking the RMON link brings up the RMON ETHERNET STATISTICS page Figure 7 171 which displays RMON Ethernet statistics information The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 139 Table 7 139 RMON Ethernet Statistics Page Parameters Parameter Index Port Octets Packets Broadcast Packets Multicast Packets CRC Errors Under Size Packets Over Size Packtes Fragments Jabbers Collisions Description This parameter specifies the index This parameter specifies the port This parameter specifies the number of octets received This parameter specifies the number of packets received This parameter specifies the number of broadcast packets received This parameter specifies the number of multicast packets received This parameter specifies the number of packets received with crc errors This parameter specifies the number of under size packets received This parameter specifies the number of over size packets received This parameter specifies th
21. The DVMRP link allows you to view DVMRP statistics through the following pages DVMRP Routers on page 7 246 DVMRP Multicast Routers on page 7 247 DVMRP Prune Statistics on page 7 248 DVMRP Routers Figure 7 210 DVMRP Routes Page DVMRP Routes Clicking the ROUTES tab brings up the DVMRP ROUTES page Figure 7 210 which displays DVMRP routes information The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 179 Table 7 179 DVMRP Routes Page Parameters This parameter specifies the network address for this route This parameter specifies the metric value for this route This parameter specifies the neighbor address for this route 7 246 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware DVMRP Multicast Routers Figure 7 211 DVMRP Multicast Routes Page DVMRP Multicast Routes Clicking the MULTICAST ROUTES tab brings up the DVMRP MULTICAST ROUTES page Figure 7 211 which displays DVMRP multicast routes information The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 180 Table 7 180 DVMRP Multicast Routes Page Parameters Source Network This parameter specifies the source network RPF Neighbor This parameter specifies the RPF neighbor Expiry Time This parameter specifies the expiry time in seconds 7 247 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual DVMRP Prune Statistics Figure 7 212 DVMRP Prune Statistics Page DVMRP Prune Statistics Clicking the PRUNE FORWARD tab brings
22. Unicast MAC Figure 7 65 VLAN Unicast MAC Settings Page Vian Unicast Mac Settings Clicking the UNICAST MAC tab brings up the VLAN UNICAST MAC SETTINGS page Figure 7 65 which allows you to configure the various parameters for VLAN Unicast MAC settings The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 45 Table 7 45 VLAN Unicast Mac Settings Page Parameters This parameter specifies the VLAN Identifier MAC Limit This parameter indicates the MAC limit 7 76 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Wildcard Figure 7 66 Wildcard Settings Page Wildcard Settings jo Broadcast Address i _ Clicking the WILDCARD tab brings up the WILDCARD SETTINGS page Figure 7 66 which configures wildcard MAC addresses and ports for VLANs The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 46 Table 7 46 Wildcard Settings Page Parameters Content ID This parameter allows you to select the CONTENT ID Ports This parameter allows you to enter a port 7 77 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Switch Port VLAN Figure 7 67 SwitchPort Vlan Filtering Page SwitchPort Vian Filtering Gi0 1 Ex0 3 Clicking the SWITCH PORT FILTERING tab brings up the SWITCHPORT VLAN FILTERING page Figure 7 67 which configures utility criteria for SwitchPort Vlan filtering The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 47 Table 7 47 SwitchPort Vlan Filtering Page Parameter
23. Version 3 is the most secure model as it allows packet encryption with the private key word 7 34 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 18 SNMP Group Access Settings Page Parameters Continued With this parameter the no authentication option disables authentication The AUTHENTICATION option enables Message digest MD5 or Secure Hash Algorithm SHA packet authentication The PRIVATE option selects both AUTHENTICATION and PRIVACY Security Level Write View This parameter allows you to specify the WRITE VIEW identifier Use this parameter to specify whether the STORAGE TYPE is Volatile or Storage Type Non Volatile SNMP View Tree Settings Figure 7 29 SNMP View Tree Settings Page SNMP ViewTree Settings Clicking the VIEW tab brings up the SNMP VIEW TREE SETTINGS page Figure 7 29 which allows configuration of view trees A SUBTREE when combined with the corresponding instance of a Mask defines a family of view subtrees The VIEW NAME is the name for a family of view subtrees This page also displays the STORAGE TYPE of the VIEWTREE table SNMP Group and SNMP Access settings have to be created prior to the Group View configuration The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 19 7 35 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 19 SNMP View Tree Settings Page Parameters View Name This parameter specifies a VIEW NAME string Mask This parameter specifi
24. drops or flow control depending on the per port flow control configuration in the PORT folder If the flow control of a particular port is enabled then the switch uses flow control to inhibit any excess traffic If the flow control is disabled the excess frames will be dropped To configure the ingress rate limit for a port click on RATE in the left hand side bar The RATE LIMIT AND STORM CONTROL screen appears as Figure 6 14 Figure 6 14 Rate Limit and Storm Control Screen SUPERMICR Rate Limit and Storm Control q Ingress Ingress Rate Fort Rate 1048576 Kbips 13 1048576 Kbips 1048576 Kbips 14 1048576 Kbips 3 1048576 Kbips 15 1048576 Kbips 1048576 Kbips 16 11048576 Kbips 1048576 Kbips 17 1048576 Kbips 11049576 Koips 1E 1048578 Kbips L2 Management _07 1048576 Kbips 19 1048576 Kbips a Spanning Tree 08 1048570 Kbips 20 1048576 Kbips 802 1x 9 1048576 Kbips 21 1048576 Kbips 1048576 Kbips 048576 Kbips 1048576 Kbips 23 048576 Kbips 1048576 Kbips 24 1048576 Kbips Password _ Storm Control disabled Logout IGMP Snooping Cable Diagnosti The screen shows the Ingress Rate in kilobits per sec for all ports Click on the port number to control the ingress rates for the port There are eight different levels to select no limit 1Gbps 256Kbps 1Mbps 4Mbps 16Mbps 64Mbps 128Mbps or 512Mbps The STORM CONTROL indicates
25. s Manual OSPF V3 The OSPF v3 link allows you to configure the OSPF v3 protocol through the following pages OSPFV3 Basic Settings on page 7 140 Interface on page 7 141 Area on page 7 143 OSPF V3 External Aggregation on page 7 144 OSPF v3 Basic Settings Figure 7 124 OSPFv3 Basic Settings Page OSPF v3 Basic Settings id Clicking the BASIC SETTINGS tab brings up the OSPF v3 BASIC SETTINGS page Figure 7 124 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 98 Table 7 98 OSPFv3 Basic Settings Page Parameters OSPFv3 Status This parameter enables or disables OSPFv3 administratively Autonomous System Border Router Status This parameter specifies the router as Autonomous System border router 7 140 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 98 OSPFv3 Basic Settings Page Parameters Continued This parameter specifies maximum number of non default External LSDB Limit AS external LSAs entries that can be stored in the link state database Demand Extension This parameter indicates the router s support for demand routing SPF Delay el indicates the delay in routing calculation after a topology This parameter specifies whether all the OSPFv3 interfaces created after Default Passive Interface this setting are passive or not Interface Figure 7 125 Interface Settings Page Refresh Support Help About Log Out SUPERMICRO EER HER SWITCH SBM GEM X2C
26. then each queue has an equal opportunity to transmit frames just like in round robin queuing To configure the QoS click the QOS folder on the left hand side bar It should display as shown in Figure 6 13 The OOS SETTING sets the priority relationship between the four queues selects the scheduling method for those queues associates packets of specific priorities to specific queues and specifies a weight for each queue 6 16 Chapter 6 1 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware System Port Statistics VLAN Trunking Mirror Rate L2 Management Spanning Tree 802 1x IGMP Snooping Cable Diagnostic SUPERMICR Figure 6 13 QoS Setting Screen Table 6 5 QoS Setting Screen Controls Scheduling Method Priority This specifies one of the two scheduling methods Strict and Weighted Round Robin for the queues This indicates packet priority This value is retrieved from the priority tag field with values from 0 to 7 0 indicates the lowest priority and 7 indicates the highest priority Click on the radio button to send packets of a specific priority to a particular queue 6 17 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 6 8 Rate Control The switch supports per port rate control When the data rate of the incoming frame for a particular port exceeds a selected rate the excess frame traffic is subject to packet
27. 0 Sharedlan Disabled Discarding Ex0 3 80 00 00 30 48 90 00 e2 32768 0 00 00 30 48 90 00e2 80 1b 0 80 00 00 30 48 23 00 03 32768 PointtoPont Root Forwarding Clicking the CIST PORT STATUS tab brings up the MSTP CIST PORT STATUS page Figure 7 80 which displays MSTP CIST port specific information The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 58 Table 7 58 MSTP CIST Port Status Page Parameters Parameter Designated Root Designated Bridge Designated Port Designated Cost Regional Root Regional Path Cost Type Description This parameter specifies the unique Bridge Identifier of the Bridge recorded as the Root for the segment to which the port is attached This parameter specifies the Bridge Identifier of the bridge which this port considers to be the Designated Bridge for this port s segment This parameter specifies the Port Identifier of the port on the Designated Bridge for this port s segment This parameter specifies the path cost of the Designated Port of the segment connected to this port This parameter specifies the unique Bridge Identifier of the bridge recorded as the CIST Regional Root Identifier in the configuration BPDUs transmitted This parameter specifies the contribution of this port to the path cost of paths towards the CIST Regional Root which includes this port This parameter specifies the operational point to point status of the LAN segment attached to this po
28. 00 00 00 RMON Go2 o 0 o o 0 o o o o o o 00 00 00 00 00 00 EERS Gos o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0060000000000 ED Gos 0 0 o 0 o 0 o o 0 0 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 nere Gos o 0 o 0 0 0 o o o 0 o 00 00 00 00 0000 A Gos o 0 o o 0 o o o o o o 00 00 00 00 00 00 ve Go7 o 0 o o 0 0 o o o 0 o 00 00 00 00 00 00 RIP Gos 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 9 0 0 o 00 00 00 00 00 00 ose Goo o 0 o o 0 0 o 0 0 o o 00 00 00 00 00 00 ESE Goio 0 0 0 0 o 0 o 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 Me ag con o 0 0 o 0 o 0 o 0 0 o 00 00 00 00 00 00 Dimas con o o o o 0 0 o 0 o 0 o 00 00 00 00 0000 Gos o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 Gon o 0 o o 0 0 o 0 o 0 o 00 00 00 00 00 00 Gos o 0 0 o 0 0 0 o 0 0 o 00 00 00 00 00 00 Gois o o o o 0 0 o o o 0 o 00 00 00 00 00 00 Eo o o o o 0 0 o o o o o 00 00 00 00 00 00 E02 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 o o o o 00 00 00 00 00 00 E03 1 o o o 0 o o o o 0 2 003048 90004 Clicking the SUPP SESSION STATS tab brings up the 802 1X SUPPLICANT SESSION STATISTICS page Figure 7 187 which displays information about the 802 1x supplicant session The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 156 Table 7 156 802 1x Supplicant Session Statistics Page Parameters Parameter Description Port This parameter specifies the port index Eapol FrRx This parameter specifies the number of the EAPOL packets received Eapol FrTx This parameter specifies the number of the EAPOL packets transmitted This parameter specifies the number of the EAPOL start packet Eapol Start FrTx transm
29. 1000 This parameter specifies whether the packets must be allowed or dropped when a match has been found This parameter specifies the IP Address of the Source and Destination for which the access list must be applied This parameter specifies the Source and Destination Address Mask corresponding to the IP Address This parameter specifies the Incoming Port List for which the access list has to be applied This parameter specifies the Outgoing Port List for which the access list has to be applied IP Extended ACL Figure 7 23 IP Extended ACL Page Help About Log Out SWITCH SBM GEM X2C sus a er TN IP Extended ACL Configuration Home System Mgmt System Settings ACL Number File Management 3 Firmware Upgrade Action Permit Management Security re ac 7 Web Setinos Subnet Mask E Destination IP Address 2 Sue Mad Stack 5 3 gt Layer Mgmt Port List incoming Layer3 Mgmt Outgoing gt Multicast RER gt Statistics Protocol emp Message Code 255 Message Type 255 Dsep TOS ACK Bit RST Ba Source Port Min Source Port Max Destination Port Min Destination Port Max Add Reset Note Range for Both Source and Destination Ports cannot be given Source Subnet Dest IP Mask Priority Dscp TOS ACK RST Source Source jon Destination Bit Port Port Port Clicking the IP EXTENDED ACL tab brings up the IP EXTENDED ACL CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 23 which displays the various paramet
30. 107 DHCP Relay Configuration Page 7 121 Figure 7 108 DHCP Relay Interface Configuration Page 7 122 Figure 7 109 RIP Basic Settings Page 7 123 Figure 7 110 RIP Interface Page ees ee ee ee Re ee ee ee ee 7 124 Figure 7 111 RIP Neighbor List Page ees esse ee ee ee ee ee ee 7 125 Figure 7 112 RIP Security Settings Page esse ee ee ee ek ee Re ee 7 126 Figure 7 113 RIP Interface Specific Address Summarization Page 7 127 Figure 7 114 RIP6 Interface Configuration Page 7 128 Figure 7 115 RIP6 Filter Configuration Page 7 129 Figure 7 116 OSPF Basic Settings Page 7 131 List of Figures Figure 7 117 Figure 7 118 Figure 7 119 Figure 7 120 Figure 7 121 Figure 7 122 Figure 7 123 Figure 7 124 Figure 7 125 Figure 7 126 Figure 7 127 Figure 7 128 Figure 7 129 Figure 7 130 Figure 7 131 Figure 7 132 Figure 7 133 Figure 7 134 Figure 7 135 Figure 7 136 Figure 7 137 Figure 7 138 Figure 7 139 Figure 7 140 Figure 7 141 Figure 7 142 Figure 7 143 Figure 7 144 Figure 7 145 Figure 7 146 Figure 7 147 Figure 7 148 Figure 7 149 Figure 7 150 Figure 7 151 Figure 7 152 Figure 7 153 Figure 7 154 Figure 7 155 Figure 7 156 OSPF Area Configuration Page 7 132 OSPF Interface Configuration Page esse see ee ee ee ee 7 133 OSPF Virtual Interface Configuration Page 7 134 OSPF Neighbor Configuration Page 7 135 OSPF RRD Route Configuration Pag
31. 2 GO Disabled Enabled All Disabled EROII Disabled Enabled All Disabled Ex0 2 Disabled Enabled 11 Al Disabled ExOBN Disabled Enabled 11 All Disabled 7 72 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Clicking the PORT SETTINGS tab brings up the VLAN PORT SETTINGS page Figure 7 61 which is used to associate the VLAN ID to the port for Port based VLAN classification While associating different ports to VLANs you can also configure INGRESS FILTERING at the port level and ACCEPTABLE FRAME TYPES accept Tagged Frame Alone or All frames The other configurations provided in this page are enabling disabling per Port MAC based classification and Port Protocol based classification enabling disabling of tunneling and enabling disabling of STP BPDU Tunneling To enable STP BPDU Tunneling on an interface you must first enable tunneling on that interface Static VLAN Figure 7 62 Static VLAN Configuration Page bt omean Joaneeans Cross one Clicking the STATIC VLANs tab brings up the STATIC VLAN CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 62 which allows you to configure the VLAN related information statically Using the first table you can create new entries for uncreated VLANs VLAN ID is the mandatory field in configuring a VLAN You can also enter a VLAN NAME MEMBER PORT LIST UNTAGGED PORT and the FORBIDDEN Ports for a VLAN The second table displays the VLAN configurations
32. 229 List of Figures Figure 7 197 OSPF Link State Database Page eise ee ee ee ee eee 7 230 Figure 7 198 OSPFV3 Route Information Page 7 232 Figure 7 199 OSPFV3 Link State Database Page 7 233 Figure 7 200 VRRP Statistics Page 7 234 Figure 7 201 IGMP Snooping Clear Statistics Page 7 236 Figure 7 202 IGMP Snooping V1 V2 Statistics Page 7 237 Figure 7 203 IGMP Snooping V3 Statistics Page 7 238 Figure 7 204 IGMP Route StatisticsPage iese ee eee tee ee ee 7 239 Figure 7 205 PIM Interface Statistics Page 7 241 Figure 7 206 PIM Neighbor Statistics Page 7 242 Figure 7 207 PIM BSR Info Page eke ee ee ee ee ee ee 7 243 Figure 7 208 PIM RP Information Page 7 244 Figure 7 209 PIM Route Information Page cee eee eee tee ee ee 7 245 Figure 7 210 DVMRP Routes Page 7 246 Figure 7 211 DVMRP Multicast Routes Page 7 247 Figure 7 212 DVMRP Prune Statistics Page iese eee eee ee eee teeta 7 248 Figure A 1 AOC IBH 001 Mezzanine HCA Card A 2 Figure A 2 AOC IBH 002 Mezzanine HCA Card esse ede sees ee ee ee ee ee ee A 3 Figure A 3 AOC IBH 003 Mezzanine HCA Card A 4 Figure A 4 AOC IBH XDS Mezzanine HCA Card A 5 Figure A 5 AOC IBH XDD Mezzanine HCA Card A 6 Figure A 6 AOC IBH XQS Mezzanine HCA Card A 7 Figure A 7 AOC IBH XQD Mezzanine HCA Card A 8 Figure A 8 Installation Location A 9 Figure A 9 Card Installation A 11 Figure A 10 Installation C
33. 34 NTP Settings Page Parameters Parameter NTP Client Settings NTP Status Receive Server Update Timezone Settings Hour Offset Minutes Offset NTP Servers Server IP Address Key Description This field enables or disables NTP in the switch Configure the NTP SERVERS section to enable NTP The value for this parameter could be Broadcast or Unicast To process the broadcast NTP updates from the server choose the Broadcast option This parameter allows you to enter an hour offset from GMT for local time This parameter allows you to enter a minutes offset after hour offset from GMT for local time Use this parameter to enter the NTP server IP address Choose the key from the configured list These keys are configurable in this page in the NTP SERVER KEYS section s fields 7 52 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 34 NTP Settings Page Parameters Continued Parameter Description Interval This parameter allows you to choose the interval from the given list This parameter allows you to choose the preferred server Choose Yes if Preferred this server needs to be preferred over other configured NTP servers You can add multiple NTP servers NTP Servers Keys Key ID Use this parameter to select a number to identify the configured key y strings Key Strin Use this paramter to specify any string to be used as a key to handshake y 9 with NTP servers Stack The
34. 512 1023 bytes Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 6 3 Port Statistics Screen Controls Continued Control Description 1519 9216 Bytes Rx indicates received packets with a packet length that is between includes Pkts 1519 9216 bytes 1519 9216 Bytes Tx indicates transmitted packets with a packet length that is between Pkts includes 1519 9216 bytes Virtual LAN VLAN is a technology used to create several independent logical networks in a physical network Hence it reduces the size of the broadcast domain in a network Packets are forwarded within the same VLAN It can also be used to combine several network segments into a same group of networks that appear as a single LAN to create a flexible and extensible LAN network system The VLAN screen is shown in Figure 6 8 Figure 6 8 VLAN Screen YAA 1009 BY VIIVVIVVIVVVVVVIIVWVVB UPERMICRO uessssssssssasesessseasaasl Link OSSFVVIVVIVV9IVVVVIV0 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Help VLANID x Create NewVLAN _ VLANID Member ports Wro egress packet A Untag egress packet 1 01 02 03 04 05 08 07 08 09 10 14 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Click on VLAN ID to change member state or remove vlan Spanning Tree 802 1x The switch supports an 802 1Q tagging VLAN All packets entering the port of a switch only can be forwarded to a port
35. 6 2 Port Configuration Screen Controls Auto Negotiation Flow Control Specifies the port number to control Enables or disables auto negotiation When auto negotiation is enabled the port negotiates with the link partner and works out speed duplex operation and flow control When auto negotiation is disabled port speed duplex operation and flow control is programmable by the user Turns flow control on or off When flow control of the port is on it sends out a Pause frame or a Jam Packet if it is over subscribed When this port receives a Pause Frame or Jam Signal it will postpone sending for a certain period to send out a frame by IEEE definition PVID Assigns default port VLAN ID for the port When the port receives a frame which is untagged or priority tagged VLAN ID 0 the PVID will be used for forwarding decision for these two kind of frame 6 6 Chapter 6 1 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware 6 2 Statistics The STATISTICS screen displays the total number of packets transmitted or received on each port as shown in Figure 6 6 Click on the REFRESH button to retrieve the current count and update the screen Click on the CLEAR COUNTERS button to reset the count to zero for each port Click on each port number to retrieve detail statistic information for that particular port 2 2 olelelelelelelelels OF d T elelelslelelslels r
36. 7 15 Figure 7 12 Management User Account Page 7 16 Figure 7 13 Radius Server Configuration Page 7 17 Figure 7 14 TACACS Global Settings Page esse ee ee ke ee ee 7 18 Figure 7 15 TACACS Server Configuration Page 7 19 Figure 7 16 IP Authorized Manager Page 7 20 Figure 7 17 SSH Configuration 7 21 Figure 7 18 SSL Configuraiton Page iese ee ee Re ee Re Re ee ee ee 7 22 Figure 7 19 Syslog Configuration Page 7 24 Figure 7 20 Syslog Mail Configuration Page 7 25 Figure 7 21 MAC ACL Configuration Page 7 26 Figure 7 22 IP Standard ACL Configuration Page 7 27 Figure 7 23 IP Extended ACL Page 7 28 Figure 7 24 Web GUI Settings Page 7 30 Figure 7 25 SNMP Agent Control Settings Page 7 31 Figure 7 26 SNMP Community Settings Page 7 32 Figure 7 27 SNMP Group Settings Page 7 33 Figure 7 28 SNMP Group Access Settings Page eise ee see ee ee ee 7 34 Figure 7 29 SNMP View Tree Settings Page 7 35 Figure 7 30 SNMP Target Address Settings Page ese ee see ee ke 7 36 Figure 7 31 SNMP Target Parameter Settings Page 7 37 Figure 7 32 SNMP Security Settings Page 7 38 Figure 7 33 SNMP Trap Settings Page 7 39 Figure 7 34 SNMP AgentX Subagent Settings Page 7 40 Figure 7 35 RMON Basic Settings Page 7 42 Figure 7 36 Event Configuration Settings Page 7 43 List of Figures Figure 7 37 Figure 7 38 Figure 7 39 Figure 7 40 Figure 7 41 Figure 7 42 Figure 7 43
37. 7 162 Table 7 163 Table 7 164 IGMP Group Configuration Page Parameters ce 7 176 IGMP Source Information Page Parameters 7 177 PIM Basic Settings Page Parameters 7 178 PIM Component Configuration Page Parameters esse 7 179 PIM Interface Configuration Page Parameters esse sees see 7 180 Candidate RP Configuration Page Parameters esse sees 7 181 PIM Threshold Configuration Page Parameters esse ese 7 182 Static RP Configuration Page Parameters 7 183 DVMRP Basic Settings Page Parameters esse esse ese 7 184 DVMRP Interface Settings Page Parameters esse sesse esse 7 185 Interface Statistics Page Parameters 7 187 Ethernet Statistics Page Parameters esse sesse ee ee 7 189 Radius Server Statistics Page Parameters 7 190 TACACS Statistics Page Parameter sesse ese ee 7 192 RMON Ethernet Statistics Page Parameters esse sees esse 7 194 SNMP Statistics Page Parameters 7 196 Agentx Subagent Statistics Page Parameters sesse 7 197 VLAN Current Database Page Parameters iese esse eke 7 199 VLAN Port Statistics Page Parameters 7 200 VLAN Multicast Table Page Parameters 7 201 VLAN Counter Statistics Page Parameters ies esse esse 7 202 VLAN Capabilities
38. 7 52 Port Status Configuration Page Parameters Parameter Port Status Priority Path Cost Protocol Migration PortFast Point to Point Auto Edge Status Description This parameter specifies the port identifier This parameter enables or disables the RSTP protocol status on a particular port This parameter specifies the port priority used in role selection This parameter specifies the path cost associated with this port This parameter controls the migration from RSTP to STP if the other side of the switch runs STP The migration takes place only if this is Enabled This parameter must be configured if the corresponding port is an edge port This parameter allows you to configure ports explicitly as Point to point Force true Non point to point or leave the decision to be made Dynamically from the AL or MAC layer If this parameter is set to true the edge port status is dynamically calculated 7 84 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 52 Port Status Configuration Page Parameters Continued Restricted Role This parameter specifies the RESTRICTED ROLE status of the port Port Status Figure 7 74 RSTP Port Status Page RSTP Port Status Gi0 1 Ex0 3 Clicking the PORT STATUS tab brings up the RSTP PORT STATUS page Figure 7 74 which displays RSTP port specific information The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 53 Table 7 53 RSTP Po
39. BSR Pref Apply Delete Clicking the INTERFACES tab brings up the PIM INTERFACE CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 160 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 129 Table 7 129 PIM Interface Configuration Page Parameters Parameter Interface Component ID Hello Interval Seconds Join Prune Interval Seconds Description This parameter specifies the interface index This parameter specifies a number uniquely identifying the component This parameter specifies the time interval between two successive Hello messages being sent by PIM on this interface This parameter specifies the time interval between two successive Join Prune messages being sent by PIM on this interface 7 180 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 129 PIM Interface Configuration Page Parameters Continued CBSR Preference This parameter indicates the preference value for the local interface as a candidate bootstrap router Candidate RPs Figure 7 161 Candidate RP Configuration Page Candidate RP Configuration Clicking the CANDIDATE RPS tab brings up the CANDIDATE RP CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 161 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 130 Table 7 130 Candidate RP Configuration Page Parameters Component ID This parameter specifies a number uniquely identifying the component Group Mask This parameter specifies the subnet mask which when combined with the
40. DHCP relay status that can be enabled or Service BACH Roly disabled in the switch using this field DHCP Server Address This parameter indicates the IP address of the DHCP Server to which the Relay Agent needs to forward the packets from the client 7 121 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Interface Settings Figure 7 108 DHCP Relay Interface Configuration Page DHCP Relay Interface Configuration Clicking the INTERFACE CONF tab brings up the DHCP RELAY INTERFACE CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 108 which allows you to configure the DHCP relay for VLANs The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 83 Table 7 83 DHCP Relay Interface Configuration Page Parameters VLAN Interface This parameter specifies the VLAN Interface name Remote ID This parameter specifies the Remote identifer 7 122 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware RIP The RIP link opens the following links for configuration of RIP protocol RIP Basic Settings on page 7 123 Interfaces on page 7 124 Neighbors List on page 7 125 Security Settings on page 7 126 Address Summarization on page 7 127 RIP Basic Settings Figure 7 109 RIP Basic Settings Page RIP Basic Settings Clicking the BASIC SETTINGS tab brings up the RIP BASIC SETTINGS page Figure 7 109 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 84 Table 7 84 RIP Basic Settings Page Parameters Output dela This param
41. Errors o In Dest Unreaches In Time Excds In Param Probs In PktTooBigs In Echos In EchoReps In Router Solicits In Router Advertisements In Neighbour Solicits In neighbour Advertisements In Redirects In Admin Probib Out Messages Out Errors Ssesecesescecscececoesececcscece which displays ICMPv6 statistics The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 161 ICMPv6 Statistics Page Parameters Parameter In Message In Errors In Dest Unreaches In Time Excds In Param Probs In PktTooBigs In Echos In EchoReps In Router Solicits In Router Advertisements In Neighbor Solicits In Neighbor Advertisements Description This parameter specifies the number of messages received This parameter specifies the number of messages received with errors This parameter specifies the number of destination unreachable messages received This parameter specifies the number of receive timeouts This parameter specifies the number of parameters probed This parameter specifies the number of too big packets received This parameter specifies the number of echo requests received This parameter specifies the number of echo responses received This parameter specifies the number of received router solicits This parameter specifies the number of routers advertisement received This parameter specifies the number of received neighbor solicits This parameter specifies the number of received nei
42. Figure 7 131 which allows you to configure the Local Preference value for routes The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 105 Table 7 105 BGP Local Preference Configuration Page Parameters Local Preference ID IP Address Prefix Intermediate AS Value Status This parameter specifies the Local Preference ID which is the index for this table This parameter specifies the IP Address prefix for which the update is received This parameter represents the intermediate AS between the BGP peers This parameter specifies the Local preference value to be associated with this learnt path This parameter specifies the status of the entry 7 150 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware BGP Filter Figure 7 132 BGP Filter Configuration Page 1 Pret Rou BGP Filter Configuration Clicking the FILTERS tab brings up the BGP FILTER CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 132 which is used to set the filters on the routes being learnt The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 106 Table 7 106 BGP Filter Configuration Page Parameters Filter ID This parameter specifies the filter index IP Address This parameter specifies the IP address for which the route is being learnt Intermediate AS This parameter represents the intermediate AS between the BGP peers With this parameter you can choose either to Allow not to filter or Deny Action Filter for the above configuration set
43. Figure 7 87 which displays the various 802 1x Basic Settings parameters The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 63 Table 7 63 802 1x Basic Settings Page Parameters System Control This parameter starts or shutsdown 802 1x in the switch 7 100 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 63 802 1x Basic Settings Page Parameters Continued as This parameter specifies the Authentication Server Location as Remote or Authentication Server Local Port Settings Figure 7 88 802 1x Port Settings Page 802 1x Port Settings Gi0 1 Ex0 3 Se BEE PotBased PonSssed Bam gt PotBased Bom ALETA Clicking the PORT SETTINGS tab brings up the 802 1x PORT SETTINGS page Figure 7 88 which configures security information at the individual port levels The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 64 7 101 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 64 802 1x Port Settings Page Parameters This parameter specifies the Index of the port for which its fields such as PORT CONTROL PORT AUTHORIZATION STATUS and so on are configured Port Authorization Status Admin Control Direction Port Initialize Reauthentication This parameter specifies current status of the port either as Authorized or Un Authorized This parameter specifies whether security is to be imposed for In the incoming traffic Both both incoming and ou
44. GEM X2C 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet switch module is a 1 Gbps Ethernet switch with three external 10 Gbps uplink and two external 1 Gbps Ethernet uplink ports The following pages contain some installation instructions that are common to both switches NOTE The pass through modules do not require any special setup or V4 configuration just installation in their bays The SBM GEM 002 Gigabit pass through module uses the same single bays as the Gigabit Ethernet switch modules while the SBM XEM 002 10 Gigabit pass through module requires a double wide bay for its installation into the SuperBlade enclosure See the SuperBlade User s Manual for details on double wide bay setup 3 1 Installing Removing a Switch Module Follow the procedures below for installing or uninstalling any of the Gigabit Ethernet switch modules into a SuperBlade system Installing a Switch Module 1 Make sure the cover to the module has been installed before proceeding Follow the anti static precautions described in Chapter 2 2 Remove the dummy cover from the bay you want to place the module in 3 Place the module s release handle in the open position 4 Slide the module into the module bay until it stops see Figure 3 1 and Figure 3 2 3 1 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Figure 3 1 Blade Enclosure with 1 Gbps Switch Modules Installed SBM GEM 001 Switch Modules SBM IBS 001 4x DDR InfiniBand Switch Module 3 2 Chapter
45. Network Modules User s Manual RIP6 The RIP6 link allows you to view RIP6 statistics through the following pages RIP6 Interface Statistics on page 7 226 RIP6 Route Information on page 7 227 RIP6 Interface Statistics Figure 7 194 RIP6 Interface Statistics Page RIP6 Interface Statistics Clicking the INTERFACE STATISTICS tab brings up the RIP6 INTERFACE STATISTICS page Figure 7 194 which displays RIPng statistics The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 163 Table 7 163 RIP6 Interface Statistics Page Parameters Interface ID This parameter specifies the interface identifier In Req This parameter specifies the number of RIPng request packets received This parameter specifies the number of RIPng unknown command packets In Urik Gmid received 7 226 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 163 RIP6 Interface Statistics Page Parameters Continued In Discards This parameter specifies the number of received packets discarded This parameter specifies the number of RIPng request packets Out Req transmitted This parameter specifies the number of RIPng triggered updates Out TrigUpd transmitted RIP6 Route Information Figure 7 195 RIP6 Route Information Page RIP6 Route Information Clicking the ROUTE INFORMATION tab brings up the RIP6 ROUTE INFORMATION page Figure 7 195 which displays information about RIPng routes The parameters
46. Network Modules User s Manual RRD6 The RRD6 link allows you to perform RRD6 related configuration through the following pages e RRD6 Basic Settings on page 7 160 Filters on page 7 161 RRD V6 OSPF on page 7 162 RRD RIP on page 7 163 RRD6 Basic Settings Figure 7 140 RRD6 Basic Settings Page RRD6 Basic Settings Clicking the BASIC SETTINGS tab brings up the RRD6 BASIC SETTINGS page Figure 7 140 which has the single parameter option of changing the throat limit for RRD6 7 160 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Filters Figure 7 141 RRD6 Filter Configuration Page RRD6 Filter Configuration 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 128 O _Detete Clicking the FILTERS tab brings up the RRD6 FILTER CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 141 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 114 Table 7 114 RRD6 Filter Configuration Page Parameters IPv6 address This parameter specifies the IPv6 Address Source This parameter denotes the address of the Source With this parameter you can either choose to Permit not to filter or Deny Action Filter for the above configuration set 7 161 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual RRD V6 OSPF Figure 7 142 RRD6 OSPF v3 Configuration Page RRD6 OSPF v3 Configuration Note OSPFv3 Module should be enabled to enable route redistribution functionality in OSPFv3 Clicking the OSPF v3 tab
47. None as Authentication Type the authentication type 7 134 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 93 OSPF Virtual Interface Configuration Page Parameters Continued This parameter specifies the key required for authentication if Authentication Key authentication is enabled on this interface OSPF Neighbor Figure 7 120 OSPF Neighbor Configuration Page OSPF Neighbor Configuration Clicking the NEIGHBOR tab brings up the OSPF NEIGHBOR CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 120 which allows you to configure OSPF neighbors The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 94 Table 7 94 OSPF Neighbor Configuration Page Parameters Neighbor IP Address This parameter specifies the neighbor router ID 7 135 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual OSPF RRD Route Configuration Figure 7 121 OSPF RRD Route Configuration Page RRD Route OSPF RRD Route Configuration Clicking the RRD ROUTE tab brings up the OSPF RRD ROUTE CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 121 which displays the various parameters for RRD Route configuration The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 95 Table 7 95 OSPF RRD Route Configuration Page Parameters Destination Network This parameter specifies the DESTINATION NETWORK Route Metric This parameter specifies the ROUTE METRIC Route Tag This parameter specifies the ROUTE TAG 7 136 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware OSP
48. OSPF Interface Configuration Clicking the INTERFACE tab brings up the OSPF INTERFACE CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 118 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 92 Table 7 92 OSPF Interface Configuration Page Parameters Interface This parameter specifies the interface index of the port This parameter specifies the priority of this interface which is used in the Priority DR election algorithm MD5 Key ID This parameter specifies the secret key used to create the message digest y appended to the OSPF packet if the authentication type is MD5 IP Address This parameter specifies the IP Address of the OSPF interface 7 133 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 92 OSPF Interface Configuration Page Parameters Continued When this parameter is enabled the interface is advertised as an internal Status route to some area When disabled it denotes that the interface is external to OSPF Virtual Interface Figure 7 119 OSPF Virtual Interface Configuration Page OSPF Virtual Interface Configuration Clicking the VIRTUAL INTERFACE tab brings up the OSPF VIRTUAL INTERFACE CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 119 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 93 Table 7 93 OSPF Virtual Interface Configuration Page Parameters Transit Area ID This parameter specifies the transit area that the virtual link traverses This parameter allows you to choose MD5 Simple Password or
49. Page i esse sees ee 7 168 IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration Page 7 169 IGMP Snooping VLAN Router Ports Page iese sesse 7 170 MAC Based Multicast Forwarding Table Page 7 171 Dynamic Multicast Global Configuration Page ee 7 172 Dynamic Multicast Port Configuration Page esse esse see 7 173 IGMP Configuration Page 7 174 IGMP Interface Configuration Page 7 175 IGMP Group Configuration Page 7 176 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Figure 7 157 Figure 7 158 Figure 7 159 Figure 7 160 Figure 7 161 Figure 7 162 Figure 7 163 Figure 7 164 Figure 7 165 Figure 7 166 Figure 7 167 Figure 7 168 Figure 7 169 Figure 7 170 Figure 7 171 Figure 7 172 Figure 7 173 Figure 7 174 Figure 7 175 Figure 7 176 Figure 7 177 Figure 7 178 Figure 7 179 Figure 7 180 Figure 7 181 Figure 7 182 Figure 7 183 Figure 7 184 Figure 7 185 Figure 7 186 Figure 7 187 Figure 7 188 Figure 7 189 Figure 7 190 Figure 7 191 Figure 7 192 Figure 7 193 Figure 7 194 Figure 7 195 Figure 7 196 IGMP Source Information Page 7 177 PIM Basic Settings Page 7 178 PIM Component Configuration Page 7 179 PIM Interface Configuration Page 7 180 Candidate RP Configuration Page 7 181 PIM Threshold Configuration Page 7 182 Static RP Configuration Page 7 183 DVMRP Basic Settings Page 7 184 DVMRP Interface Settings Page eise esse ee
50. Page Parameters ees ees es ee ee ee ee Re ee ee 7 70 Table 7 43 VLAN Basic Settings Page Parameters 7 72 Table 7 44 VLAN Port MAC Map Page Parameters eise esse esse esse ee 7 75 Table 7 45 VLAN Unicast Mac Settings Page ParameterS sesse esse ees 7 76 Table 7 46 Wildcard Settings Page Parameters iese sesse see ek ee ee ee 7 77 Table 7 47 SwitchPort Vlan Filtering Page Parameters 7 78 List of Tables Table 7 48 Table 7 49 Table 7 50 Table 7 51 Table 7 52 Table 7 53 Table 7 54 Table 7 55 Table 7 56 Table 7 57 Table 7 58 Table 7 59 Table 7 60 Table 7 61 Table 7 62 Table 7 63 Table 7 64 Table 7 65 Table 7 66 Table 7 67 Table 7 68 Table 7 69 Table 7 70 Table 7 71 Table 7 72 Table 7 73 Table 7 74 Table 7 75 Table 7 76 Table 7 77 Table 7 78 Table 7 79 Table 7 80 Table 7 81 Table 7 82 Table 7 83 Table 7 84 Table 7 85 Table 7 86 Table 7 87 Dynamic VLAN Port Configuration Page Parameters iese 7 80 Garp Timers Configuration Page Parameters 7 81 Global Configuration Page Parameters sesse eke ee ee ee 7 82 RSTP Configuration Page Parameters esse sesse ese ese ee ke 7 83 Port Status Configuration Page Parameters sesse esse ese ee 7 84 RSTP Port Status Page Parameters 7 85 Global Configuration Page Parameters sesse eke ee ee ee 7 87 CIST
51. Parameters 7 114 ND Cache Configuration Page Parameters esse ese ee ee 7 116 Address Settings Page Parameters 7 116 Address Profile Settings Page Parameters 7 117 Prefix Configuration Page Parameters esse es ees ee ee 7 118 DHCP Basic Settings Page Parameters esse sesse esse see ek ee 7 119 DHCP Pool Settings Page Parameters 7 120 DHCP Relay Configuration Page Parameters esse sesse 7 121 DHCP Relay Interface Configuration Page Parameters 7 122 RIP Basic Settings Page Parameters eise esse ee ee ke 7 123 RIP Interface Page Parameters esse ees ee ee ee ee ee ee 7 124 RIP Security Setting Page Parameters esse es esse ee ee ee 7 126 RIP Interface Specific Address Summarization Page Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Parameters EE RR ened ene 7 127 Table 7 88 RIP6 Interface Configuration Page Parameters 7 128 Table 7 89 RIP6 Filter Configuration Page Parameters 7 130 Table 7 90 OSPF Basic Settings Page Parameters iese ese esse eke 7 131 Table 7 91 OSPF Area Configuration Page Parameters 7 132 Table 7 92 OSPF Interface Configuration Page Parameters iese sesse 7 133 Table 7 93 OSPF Virtual Interface Configuration Page Parameters 7 134 Table 7 94 OSPF Neighbor Conf
52. Pass through Module 54321 15 1413 12 11 5 8 Chapter 5 Ethernet Modules Table 5 11 SBM GEP T20 Gigabit Pass through Module Interface Item Description 1 Module Release Handles 2 RJ45 Ethernet Ports 3 Ethernet Port Status LEDs Table 5 12 SBM GEP T20 Gigabit Ethernet Pass through Module Features Feature Description Internal Twenty 1 Gbps downlink ports External twenty 1 Gbps RJ45 Internal External Ports uplink ports fixed speed at 1 Gbps Remote Management NA Protocols NA Power Consumption 30 6W The SBM GEP T20 is a double wide module It installs in the upper left hand slot in the rear of the SuperBlade enclosure Only one SBM GEP T20 is supported per enclosure see Figure 5 6 Figure 5 6 SBM GEP T20 Installed in Enclosure 1 f 109 87 6 CT 54321 gag 20191817 16 coor 1514121211 ss ropes ge Fr td A en 1e 5 9 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Notes 6 1 Chapter 6 1 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware The firmware configuration system for the SBM GEM 001 Gigabit Ethernet switch module is covered in this chapter SBM GEM 001 Firmware Features and Functions Table 6 1 provides a summary of features and functions for the Gigabit Ethernet switch module firmware Table 6 1 SBM GEM 001 Software Features and Functions Item Basic Functions Scalability Redundancy VLAN QoS Multicast Management Functio
53. Port Allowed Ports Forbidden Ports Status Description This parameter specifies the VLAN ID This parameter specifies the destination MAC address of the received packet This parameter specifies the port on which the packet was received This parameter specifies the list of ports on which the received packet with the above set MAC address if received from the configured port can be forwarded This parameter specifies the list of ports on which the received packet with the above set MAC address if received from the configured port must NOT be forwarded You can choose to set this configuration to any one of the following types e Permanent This configuration resides even after restart of the switch e DeleteOnReset This configuration deletes the entry on restart DeleteOnTimeout This configuration deletes the entry on expiration of the ageing timer 7 6 Layer 3 Management SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM X2C SMIS Figure 7 94 Layer3 Management Page Refresh Support Help About Log Out Welcome to the Layer3 Management Page The various layer3 features of the Supermicro Switch can be configured through the links available in this page configure router and create VLAN configure ipv6 router compre pool of addresses ee coofigue DHCP Relay status o Y configure RIP frature one configure RIPng feature ote configure OSPF status y configure OSPFv6 features oe configure neighbour
54. Radius Figure 7 169 Radius Server Statistics Page Radius Server Statistics Clicking the RADIUS link brings up the RADIUS SERVER STATISTICS page Figure 7 169 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 137 Table 7 137 Radius Server Statistics Page Parameters Index This parameter specifies the port index UDP Port Number This parameter specifies the UDP PORT NUMBER No of Request Packets This parameter specifies the number of request packets transmitted No of Access Accept Packets This parameter specifies the number of accept packets No of Access Challenge Packets This parameter specifies the number of challenge packets 7 190 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 137 Radius Server Statistics Page Parameters Continued No of Bad Authenticators This parameter specifies the number of failed authentications No of Time Outs This parameter specifies the number of time outs that have happened 7 191 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual TACACS Statistics SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM X2C SMIS Figure 7 170 TACACS Statistics Page Refresh Support Help About Log Out TACACS Statistics Authentication Starts Request Authentication Continues Request Authentication Enables Request Authentication Aborts Request Authentication Pass Received Authentication Fails Received Authentication Get User Received Authentication G
55. Response administrator can tune the bursting of IGMP messages on the subnet larger Interval values make the traffic less bursty as host responses are spread out over a larger interval The number of seconds represented by the query response interval must be less than the query interval This is the maximum response time inserted into group specific queries sent in response to Leave Group messages and is also the amount of time between Ree ua group specific query messages The default value is 10 1 second This value may be tuned to modify the leave latency of the network A reduced value results in reduced time to detect the loss of the last member of a group Last Member Query This is the number of Group Specific Queries sent before the router assumes Count there are no local members Default the Robustness Variable Enable IGMP Snooping Feature This is used to enable the IGMP snooping feature Router Ports This specifies ports to which IGMP routers were connected 6 13 SNMP The SNMP agent in the gigabit switch supports SNMP v1 and v2c It also supports the following MIB e RFC1213 MIBII with standard sets which include system interfaces IP ICMP TCP UDP Dot3 and SNMP e RFC2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP using SMIv2 e RFC2665 EtherLike MIB 6 30 Chapter 6 1 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware 6 14 UpLink Failure Tracking ULFT Uplink Failure Tracking ULFT feature is provided to support network adapter
56. Rx Table B 3 10G Port LEDs Table B 3 Stacking LED Activity Stacking Switch Stack LED 4 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF Stack LED 3 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF Stack LED 2 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Stack LED 1 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Identifier 10 12 14 16 Stacking Disabled B 2 Appendix B LED Descriptions B 3 SBM IBS 001 InfiniBand Switch LED Descriptions SBM IBS 001 InfiniBand switch module LEDs are found below in Table B 4 Table B 4 SBM IBS 001 InfiniBand Switch LEDs Blink Switch is booting its firmware Module Status LED Steady On Boot process failed Switch is properly booted and operational Physical link established Port Physical Link ae 2 E LED Green Physical link error poor connection quality Port is off or has no physical connection B 3 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Notes B 4 SBM IBS Q3616 M InfiniBand Switch LED Descriptions SBM IBS Q3616 M InfiniBand switch module LEDs are found below in Table B 5 Table B 5 SBM IBS Q3616 M InfiniBand Switch LEDs LED Module Status LED Module Power LED Green Port Physical Link LED Green Port Activity LED Yellow State Blink Steady On Off Steady On Off Steady On Blink Off Steady On Blinking Off Indication Description Switch
57. SBM GEM X2C 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet Operating System Switch Firmware on page 3 9 for details LED Indicators LED indicators for the SBM GEM 001 Gigabit Ethernet switch module are listed and described in Table B 1 of Appendix B Ports The SBM GEM 001 Gigabit Ethernet switch module contains several front mounted ports as described below in Table 5 3 Table 5 3 SBM GEM 001 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Module Ports y a This port accepts an connector cable for uplink using RS 232 Chapter 5 Ethernet Modules 5 2 SBM GEM X2C 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Module The SBM GEM X2C 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet switch module is a layer 2 3 Ethernet switch It includes three 10 Gb s uplink ports two CX4 and one SPF two 1 Gb s uplink RJ45 uplink ports and fourteen 1 Gb s downlink ports for the SuperBlade s LAN interfaces The Ethernet switch module has two internal Ethernet paths to the CMM s The switch is used to provide a connection between the Ethernet controller integrated on the mainboard and an external Ethernet device This is a hot pluggable module See Figure 5 2 Table 5 4 and Table 5 5 for switch details Figure 5 2 SBM GEM X2C 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Module Ports and Indicators Table 5 4 SBM GEM X2C 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Module Interface Item Description 1 RS 232 COM Serial Port Module Fault LED Initiation OK LED Stack ID LEDs 4 10 Gbps Uplink Port Status LEDs 3 1 Gbps RJ45 Up
58. Supermicro Intelligent switch supports stacking of Supermicro switch units Switch stacking is created by connecting switches in a daisy chain One of the stacked switches is selected as a Master based on its configurations The Master switch provides management support for the whole stack Other switches in the stack are referred to as slave switches firmware f NOTE Make sure all stacked switches are running the same version of The Master switch manages the control plane traffic for all stacked switches When the current master switch fails the backup master is then selected as the current master The Master selection algorithm is based on a priority configuration If two switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address is selected as the Master switch 7 53 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual CX4 Cable Length Stacking is supported with CX 4 cables only The CX 4 cable used for stacking should be no more than 3 meters in length because stacking internally runs at 12 Gbps and therefore requires a more robust signal than longer cable lengths might provide reliably The industry standard stacking cable length is 3 meters NOTE For stacking ports you do not need to configure CX4 cable length It is fixed as short for stacking ports When used for 10G Ethernet uplinks the CX 4 ports can be from 1 meter to 12 meters in length the maximum CX 4 cable length supported on Supermicro switches i
59. Supermicro Switch software is implemented using Open sources from OpenSSL OpenSSH and other open source community View System Acknowledgement for detailed descnption Copyright 2008 Super Micro Computer Inc This page is best viewed with 10244768 resolution 7 5 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Top Page Links On the top of all pages of the web based management utility you can find the following PAGE HEADER links e Refresh Click this link to refresh the contents of the page Unlike the browser refresh button this link refreshes only the contents of the middle of the page which has the active data Support Click this link to get technical support for Supermicro Products e Help Click on this link to open a context specific help page that covers all the items on the page being viewed e About Click this link to get additional information about the web based management utility the switch and also the versions supported Log Out Click this link to log out of the web session and go back to the Login page Top LED Display This part of the screen displays the Port Status Speed and Link Status for every port of the switch Since the number of ports is different in SBM GEM X2C SSE G24 TG4 and SSE G48 TG4 switches this display displays a different number of ports for each when the Web Management Utility is run For the SBM GEM X2C switch it displays sixteen Gigabit Ethernet Gi
60. Teaming Windows Systems or Channel Bonding Linux Systems on SuperBlade servers Installing two GbE switch modules can have additional connectivity to allow increased network bandwidth redundancy and or fault tolerance The connection between internal ports of the switch and each LAN port of the server blades is hardwired through the middle plane The link will not be dropped unless either switch s internal port or the server blade s LAN port fails By enabling the ULFT feature with proper pair configuration a failover event can be triggered in the Teaming or Channel Bonding program when all of a switch s external uplink member ports fail The switch automatically enables the internal downlink ports once one of the uplink ports in the configured pair returns to service A7 NOTE By dafault the switch s ULFT feature is disabled The link status on the f external uplink ports does not affect the link status of internal downlink ports r To use ULFT you must configure a Failure Tracking Pair and enable the ULFT feature A Failure Tracking Pair consists of uplink and downlink ports The uplink tracking member contains at least one of the external ports port 1 to port 10 The downlink tracking member contains at least one of the internal ports port 11 to port 24 If Trunking is enabled on the external uplink ports then all of the trunk member ports should be configured as uplink members of a tracking pair The link to the configured inte
61. The AOC IBH XOS card has a single 4x QDR 40 Gbps port and uses a Mellanox ConnectX chip This card comes with a removable extender flange shown in Figure A 6 that allows it to be installed in all compatible SuperBlade servers Figure A 6 AOC IBH XQS Mezzanine HCA Card o m un Q z m o Superblade Network Modules User s Manual AOC IBH XQD Mezzanine HCA Card The AOC IBH XOS card has dual 4x QDR 40 Gbps ports and uses a Mellanox ConnectX chip This card comes with a removable extender flange like the one shown in Figure A 6 AOC IBH XQS Mezzanine HCA Card on page A 7 that allows it to be installed in all compatible SuperBlade servers Figure A 7 AOC IBH XQD Mezzanine HCA Card FE EE F YSN NI G3N9IS30 A 3 Installation Figure A 8 Installation Location Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Installation Location All models of the Mezzanine HCA card are compatible with both SBI and SBA blade modules The AOC IBH XQS and AOC IBH XQD cards are only compatible with the latest SBI and SBA models For the latest compatibility information see our web site http www supermicro com products superblade Card Installation To Install an HCA Card 1 Confirm that you have the correct card and three 3 screws 2 Following the instructions from the SuperBlade Manual remove the blade module and open the cover to access the mainboard 3 In a standard electro magnetically p
62. User s Manual Table 7 3 Management Security Basic Settings Page Parameters Use this parameter to choose the mode of authentication for management access By default the management access is authenticated with LOCAL user accounts information However you can choose to authenticate using Radius or TACACS instead Authentication mode Administrative users can also create Enable Passwords in this page Low privilege users can use these Enable Passwords in the WEB SETTINGS page to enable access to privilege configurations Administrative users can set an Enable Password for all privilege levels By default the Enable Password is set only for the highest level Level_15 This default password is the same as the default password set for the ADMIN user login Management User Account Figure 7 12 Management User Account Page Clicking the LOCAL USERS tab brings up the MANAGEMENT USER ACCOUNT CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 12 This page allows you to create or delete local user accounts You need more than privilege Level_5 to view all pages and need more than privilege Level_10 for changing the configurations The highest Level_15 is for Administrator privilege 7 16 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Radius Figure 7 13 Radius Server Configuration Page Refresh Support Help About Log Out Radius Server Configuration gt Statistics Clicking the RADIUS tab brings up the RADIUS SERVER CON
63. VID in the frame and the destination MAC address for the forwarding decision Look for a more detailed description in the VLAN section Jumbo Frames Support To modify the jumbo frames support for all of ports click on the EDIT OF JUMBO FRAME setting as shown in Figure 6 3 to link to the JUMBO FRAME SETTING screen Figure 6 4 Click the ENABLE JUMBO FRAME check box to enable disable jumbo frame support SUPERMICR A _ Jumbo Frame Setting System Y Enable Jumbo Frame Le Apply Statistics VLAN When a jumbo frame is enabled the maximum length of a frame that can be forwarded by a switch is 9216 When the jumbo frame is disabled the maximum length of a frame that can be forwarded by a switch is 1518 Port Configuration To modify the configuration of each port click on the port number in the PORT STATUS screen see Figure 6 3 The PORT CONFIGURATION screen appears Figure 6 5 It is used to define speed and duplexing for a port when auto negotiation is off When auto negotiation is on this data is negotiated with the link partner 6 5 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual System Statistics VLAN Trunking Figure 6 5 Port Configuration Screen SUPERMICRO PORT Configuration Auto Speed Flow Admin Negotiate Duplex Control Enable y 10Mbps Half Disable x Apply Table
64. ae idad 7 39 SNMP Agen EE see ntti cies cea GE A EENS tite ee 7 40 RMON seo Gta eh e lee do Won ee le Saget 7 42 RMON Basic SettingS iese ee ee RA Re Re Re RR ee ee irii 7 42 Event Configuration 7 43 RMON Alarm Configuration ees ee ee Re Re Re ee ke 7 44 Ethernet Statistics Configuration 7 45 History Control Configuration 7 46 QOS ed 7 47 QOS Basic Settings EE he less mire esate 7 47 QOS Classmap SettingS iii ee ee RR ER Re ER ee Re ee Re ee 7 48 QOS Policymap Settings 7 49 COSQ Scheduling Algorithme 7 50 COSQ Weight and Bandwidth Configuration esse ee ee ee 7 51 NIP Settings acota abi is 7 52 SLACK Re OO AROS GIRO C IRF CONS nodos 7 53 GX4 Gable Lengths heina ali 7 54 Enabling Stacking citar OOR N RR OE EE 7 55 Stack Configuration sesse NEE in Eer de Ee es ES ee De ED Ee ee 7 58 ede EE N EE OO ant 7 59 Ted SES ER EE EO 7 60 Stack COUNTE Ese si Ee Re lada 7 61 Bee EA EE EE EE ee RT 7 62 7 5 Layer 2 Management 7 63 Layer 2 Basic Settings i s a iis 7 64 Port Manager 2 EE dd 7 65 Port Basic Settings ii Se REDE Ee Ee ge ee tan eee vice ee a 7 65 Port MONnItOFING EE Ee nie ME eel Side EES tat 7 67 VEAN Traffic Clas Siint sr ED seg oe Bed eh ei 7 68 Table of Contents Port ee lie AE tar din eis glen aia EE mures 7 69 Rate imiting 2 12 2522 a A nt 7 70 ME RS AE EE EE RE ER OE 7 71 VLAN Basic Settings ss 7 71 POItS INQS re RA AE ORE EE EER 7 72 OER ERAS DEE RR AE MO ER N N OR 7
65. between 7 to 65535 Configuring 0 removes the existing configuration This parameter enables or disables MED comparison among paths learnt from confed peers This parameter configures the ASs that belongs to the confederation BGP Community Management Figure 7 135 BGP Community Management Page Refresh Support Help About Log Out SWITCH SBM GEM X2C sms remera remos cnn BGP Community Management Home ty 9 gt gt caver Mame y Layer3 Mgmt Extended Community Route Configurations Ive e Addie DHCP SEE Extended Comm Fier Congres RIP In Filter Ru eg jo Ow Fiter sae Extended Community Peer Configurations gt RD Extended Community Policy Configurations RRDvE VRRP gt Multicast gt Statistics Clicking the COMMUNITY tab brings up the BGP COMMUNITY MANAGEMENT page Figure 7 135 which configures BGP community and extended community parameters The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 109 7 154 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 109 BGP Community Management Page Parameters Community Route Configurations Community Peer Configurations Extended Community Route Configurations Extended Community Peer Configurations This parameter configures an entry in the Additive or Delete Community table This parameter enables or disables advertisement of community attributes to the peer This parameter configures an entry in the Additive or D
66. brings up the RRD6 OSPFV3 CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 142 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 115 Table 7 115 RRD6 OSPFv3 Configuration Page Parameters This parameter enables or disables redistribution for OSPFv3 7 162 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware RRD RIP Figure 7 143 RRD RIPv6 Configuration Page RRD RIPv6 Configuration Clicking the RP6 tab brings up the RRD RIPv6 CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 143 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 116 Table 7 116 RRD RIPv6 Configuration Page Parameters This parameter enables or disables redistribution for RIP6 With this parameter you can choose to import Direct routes Static routes or OSPFV3 routes Import 7 163 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual VRRP The VRRP link allows you to configure VRRP through the following two pages VRRP Basic Settings on page 7 164 VRRP Settings on page 7 165 VRRP Basic Settings Figure 7 144 VRRP Basic Settings Page VRRP Basic Settings Clicking the BASIC SETTINGS tab brings up the VRRP BASIC SETTINGS page Figure 7 144 whose single parameter allows you to specify the status of VRRP in the switch 7 164 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware VRRP Settings SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM X2C Figure 7 145 VRRP Settings Page Refresh Support Help About Log Out sus NEE VRRP Settings Virtual Router
67. ee Ge RR Re Ee GR GR Re ee Ge RR Re A 2 AOC IBH 001 Mezzanine HCA Card A 2 AOC IBH 002 Mezzanine HCA Card A 3 AOC IBH 003 Mezzanine HCA Card A 4 AOC IBH XDS Mezzanine HCA Card A 5 AOC IBH XDD Mezzanine HCA Card ees see ese esse ese ee ee ee ee ee ee ek ee A 6 AOC IBH XQS Mezzanine HCA Card esse esse ees ee sees ee ee ke ee ee ee A 7 AOC IBH XQD Mezzanine HCA Card A 8 AS Installations ses r s aici EE EEE A 9 Installation Location 2 c 2 c5hecesetsinezseds dobeccgenedelavtsasrtadeeegasscheveucanede A 10 Card Installation see ER EE tt EG Ee Ee ve ee eta A 10 Appendix B LED Descriptions B 1 B 1 Gigabit Ethernet Module LED Descriptions B 1 B 2 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet Module LED Descriptions B 2 B 3 SBM IBS 001 InfiniBand Switch LED Descriptions B 3 B 4 SBM IBS Q3616 M InfiniBand Switch LED Descriptions B 4 Appendix C Installing Triple Wide Bays C 1 C 1 Installing a Triple Wide Module Bay se see ee Ge RR ee ee C 1 List of Figures Figure 3 1 Blade Enclosure with 1 Gbps Switch Modules Installed 3 2 Figure 3 2 Blade Enclosure with 1 10 Gbps Switch Modules Installed 3 3 Figure 3 3 Configuring the Switch Module iese ese se Re Re ee ee Re 3 4 Figure 3 4 IPMI Login Screen 3 5 Figure 3 5 IPMI Blade System Screen 3 6 Figure 3 6 G
68. employed One requirement for load balancing is that the frames being 6 13 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual transmitted must not be out of order The switch performs load balancing based on a distribution algorithm that used the following information to assign conversation to ports e MAC source address e MAC destination address e MAC source address destination address The user can choose one of the distribution criteria from the configuration screen as shown in Figure 6 11 Configuring the Trunk 1 Click on TRUNKING folder on left hand side bar to bring up the TRUNK SETTING screen as shown in Figure 6 11 Figure 6 11 Trunking Screen 1G 100 SUPERMICRO 2 o a gt 02 Trunk Setting Distribution Criterion SA DA y Moatty Trunk Group Member Trunk ia 1 por 1 Add Del Trunk Group Member Trunk Group Member Trunkt 1 2 3 12 Management Spanning Tree e 802 1x Maximal number of ports per trunk 8 IGMP Snooping Cable Diagnostic Trunk 2 Trunk 4 2 Click on the TRUNK ID drop down list to select the trunk group to which you want to add port member 3 Click on the PORT drop down list to select the port number which you want to add to the selected trunk 4 Click on the ADD button to add it in The port number should show up under the TRUNK GROUP MEMBER in the table Click the DEL button to delete a port membe
69. for this page are shown in Table 7 164 Table 7 164 RIP6 Route Information Page Parameters Destination This parameter specifies the route destination 7 227 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 164 RIP6 Route Information Page Parameters Continued This parameter specifies the routing protocol This parameter specifies the next hop for this route This parameter specifies the route tag identifier 7 228 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware OSPF The OSPF link allows you to view OSPF statistics through the following pages OSPF Route Information on page 7 229 OSPF Link State DB on page 7 230 OSPF Route Information Figure 7 196 OSPF Route Information Page OSPF Route Information Clicking the ROUTE INFORMATION tab brings up the OSPF ROUTE INFORMATION page Figure 7 196 which displays information about OSPF routes The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 165 Table 7 165 OSPF Route Information Page Parameters IP Address This parameter specifies the IP address TOS This parameter specifies the TOS Type This parameter specifies the type Cost This parameter specifies the cost 7 229 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 165 OSPF Route Information Page Parameters Continued Interface This parameter specifies the interface OSPF Link State DB Figure 7 197 OSPF Link State Database Page OSPF
70. from the underside of each of the two horizontal spacers See Figure C 2 Step 3 amp 4 for details Figure C 2 Step 3 amp 4 Screws 4Pcs C 2 Appendix C Installing Triple Wide Bays 5 Using four screws install the long horizontal spacer to the same space where the two short spacers were removed See Figure C 3 Step 5 for details Figure C 3 Step 5 Screws 4pcs C 3 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 6 You can now install a double wide module into the bay See Figure C 4 Step 6 for details Figure C 4 Step 6 NOTE This procedure describes modifying three right most single wide bays located at the bottom of the inner enclosure The same procedure applies to the f three right most single bays located at the top of the enclosure but note that the horizontal spacers in the bottom bays use a guide pin and are not interchangeable with the upper bay spacers Modules in the upper bays will have their release handles on the bottom while modules in the lower bays will have their release handles on the top Placing modules in an upside down orientation in an upper bay only does not affect their operation C 4 Appendix C Installing Triple Wide Bays NOTE Only one triple wide module can be installed in an enclosure since each enclosure requires at least one CMM module The bottom location is recomme
71. number of dropped packets This parameter specifies the number of open fail PDUs received This parameter specifies the number of response PDUs received VLAN The VLAN link allows you to view VLAN statistics through the following pages Current DB on page 7 199 VLAN Port Statistics on page 7 200 VLAN Multicast Table on page 7 201 VLAN Counter Statistics on page 7 202 VLAN Capabilities on page 7 203 VLAN FDB Entries on page 7 204 7 198 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Current DB Figure 7 173 VLAN Current Database Page VLAN Current Database Clicking the CURRENT DB tab brings up the VLAN CURRENT DATABASE page Figure 7 173 which displays VLAN database entries The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 142 Table 7 142 VLAN Current Database Page Parameters This parameter specifies the VLAN identifer Member Ports This parameter specifies the index of member ports Status This parameter specifies the VALN status 7 199 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual VLAN Port Statistics Figure 7 174 VLAN Port Statistics Page Refresh Support SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM X2C suis VLAN Port Statistics CounterStatistics Home gt System Mgmt Layer2 Mgmt Layer3 Mgmt Discards ScSs60c00c60c006cc0 coccecccccscccsccccce Sssssssssssssssss Clicking the PORT STATISTICS tab bring
72. on page 7 26 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual e WEBGUI Settings on page 7 30 SNMP on page 7 31 RMON on page 7 42 QoS on page 7 47 e NTP Settings on page 7 52 Stack on page 7 53 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware System Settings The following pages can be accessed through the System Settings link System Settings on page 7 9 System Version on page 7 11 System Settings Figure 7 7 System Settings Page System Settings 60 00 08 1c0d 46 53 SUPERMICRO Restart of switch required if these values are changed Clicking the SYSTEM INFORMATION tab brings up the SYSTEM SETTINGS page Figure 7 7 This page provides system related information and also helps you configure system specific parameters Table 7 2 lists the parameters found on this page Table 7 2 System Information Page Parameters Device Name A configurable name can be entered into this field for the switch Subnet Mask Use this parameter to configure the subnet mask Device contact Use this parameter to change the device contact PIM Mode Use this to configure the PIM status of the switch Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 2 System Information Page Parameters Continued Parameter Snoop forwarding Mode Switch Start MAC address Configuration Restore Status Device Up Time HTTP Server Status HTTP Port Number Description You can
73. openssl reg x509 newkey rsa 1024 keyout cakey pem out cacert pem b Execute the below command also in a Linux shell 7 22 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware openssl x509 req in a csr out cert pem CA cacert pem CAkey cakey pem CAcreateserial The above steps will generate the certificate file cert pem Open the generated certificate file cert pem and delete the first line BEGIN CERTIFICATE and last line END CERTIFICATE Join all the remaining lines as single lines to avoid line breaks being processed and copy paste these joined texts in the ENTER CERTIFICATE text box back in the SSL CONFIGURATION page Click the CONFIGURE button This configures the certificate and saves it to flash memory 7 23 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Syslog The Syslog link provides configuration controls for the following features Syslog Configuration on page 7 24 Syslog Mail Configuration on page 7 25 Syslog Configuration Figure 7 19 Syslog Configuration Page Syslog Configuration Clicking the LOGGING tab brings up the SYSLOG CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 19 which allows you to configure logging parameters The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 9 Table 7 9 Syslog Configuration Page Parameters Syslog This parameter enables or disables the Syslog feature Buffer Size The buffer size is specfied in log entries Max entries buffered is 200
74. parameter allows you to select the speed as 10 Mbps 100 Mbps or 1 Gbps This parmeter allows you to specify the Flow Control Admin Status as either Disabled Trasmit Flow Control Enabled Receive Flow Control Enabled or both Transmit and Receive Flow Control Enabled This parameter displays the status of the flow control This parameter allows you to enable or disable Head of Line block prevention 7 69 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Rate Limiting Figure 7 59 Rate Limiting Page Rate Limiting Gi0 1 Ex0 3 Se EE ENGEN EE NEE EES Ag Clicking the RATE LIMITING tab brings up the RATE LIMITING page Figure 7 59 which allows you to configure rate limiting for the port interface The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 42 Table 7 42 Rate Limiting Page Parameters Port This displays the port number This parameter allows you to specify the destination lookup failure packets DLF Level per second Multicast Level This parameter allows you to specify the multicast packets per second This parameter allows you to specify the egress limit of packets per Egress Port Rate Limit Second 7 70 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware VLAN The VLAN link allows to configure the VLAN information VLAN configuration information has been provided in the following pages VLAN Basic Settings on page 7 71 Port Settings on page 7 72 Static VLAN o
75. ports and three 10 Gigabit Ethernet Ex Extreme Ethernet ports For the SBM GEM X2C switch it displays twenty two Gigabit Ethernet Gi ports and three 10 Gigabit Ethernet Ex Extreme Ethernet ports For the SSE G24 TG4 switch it displays twenty four Gi ports and four Ex ports For the SSE G48 TG4 switch it displays forty eight Gi ports and four Ex ports Note that Ex ports configured as stacking ports will not be displayed In stacking the Switch Identifier will be displayed on top of this LED display This allows you to select a stack member switch of interest and to view the LED display for the corresponding switch For Link a green light corresponding to a number indicates that that numbered port is up whereas a red light corresponding to a number indicates that this port is down Left Side Tree The tree display on the left side of the page provides quick access to the configuration pages This tree is organized based on the features supported in the switch The main features are categorized in the following groups System Management System based configurations e Layer 2 Management Layer 2 Protocols including VLAN RSTP MSTP Layer 3 Management Layer 3 Protocols including IP RIP OSPF 7 6 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware e Multicast Management Multicast Protocols including IGMP PIM e Statistics Statistics and Counters for all the features This tree i
76. specifies the FILTER ADDRESS for the RIP6 interface 7 130 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware OSPF The OSPF link allows you to configure the OSPF protocol through the following pages OSPF Basic Settings on page 7 131 Area on page 7 132 Interface on page 7 133 e Virtual Interface on page 7 134 OSPF Neighbor on page 7 135 OSPF RRD Route Configuration on page 7 136 OSPF Area Aggregation on page 7 137 External Aggregation on page 7 138 OSPF Basic Settings Figure 7 116 OSPF Basic Settings Page OSPF Basic Settings Clicking the BASIC SETTINGS tab brings up the OSPF BASIC SETTINGS page Figure 7 116 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 90 Table 7 90 OSPF Basic Settings Page Parameters OSPF Status This parameter specifies the global status of the protocol in the switch 7 131 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 90 OSPF Basic Settings Page Parameters Continued Parameter Autonomous System Border Router RFC 1583 Compatibility External Link State Database Limit Description This parameter indicates the flag to denote whether or not the router is to be configured as an Autonomous System Border Router This parameter specifies the compatibility to RFC 1583 for choosing the route among multiple AS for the same destination This parameter specifies the maximum number of non default AS external LSA entrie
77. the POOL SETTINS link brings up the DHCP POOL SETTINGS page Figure 7 106 which allows you to configure the IP address pool that can be used by the DHCP server to allocate IP addresses The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 81 Table 7 81 DHCP Pool Settings Page Parameters This parameter specifies the pool ID to index among the different subnet Pool ID pools configured Subnet Mask This parameter specifies the subnet mask of the IP address in the pool This parameter specifies the last IP address in the address pool that is nd IF used for dynamic allocation by the DHCP server Utilization Threshold This parameter specifies the DHCP Pool Utilization Threshold value 7 120 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware DHCP Relay The DHCP Relay link helps you to manage the DHCP relay in the switch through the following two pages DHCP Relay Basic Settings on page 7 121 Interface Settings on page 7 122 DHCP Relay Basic Settings Figure 7 107 DHCP Relay Configuration Page DHCP Relay Configuration Note To enable DHCP Relay DHCP Server Status should be disabled T LAdd Clicking the BASIC SETTINGS tab brings up the DHCP RELAY CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 107 which displays the various parameters for configuring the DHCP relay The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 82 Table 7 82 DHCP Relay Configuration Page Parameters E This parameter specifies the
78. the current status of storm control A traffic storm happens when broadcast multicast or unknown unicast packets flood the network which will degrade the network performance The storm control monitors the traffic of an incoming particular type of frame configured by the user and limits traffic to a user configurable rate level threshold The storm rate threshold is counted in number of packets per second pps If the traffic of a particular frame type exceeds the threshold during one second all the rest of that type of frame will be dropped before the end of that second The switch provides configuration to assign storm control type and rate limitations to the entire system 6 18 Chapter 6 1 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware To configure storm control click STORM CONTROL link in the RATE LIMIT AND STORM CONTROL screen Figure 6 14 The STORM CONTROL screen appears as shown in Figure 6 15 Figure 6 15 Storm Control Screen SUPERMICR ES e Storm Control Het Storm Control Type Broadcast multicast and unknown unicast ly Storm Control Rate 100 pps Apply rs D 15000 pps Table 6 6 Storm Control Screen Controls Control Description This selects the type of the packet storm The figure below shows all available Storm Control Type options Broadcast only Broadcast and multicast Broadcast unknown unicast and Broadcast multicast and unknown unicast This selects a rate pac
79. up the DVMRP PRUNE STATISTICS page Figure 7 212 which DVMRP prune statistics information The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 181 Table 7 181 DVMRP Prune Statistics Page Parameters Source Network Address This parameter specifies the source network address Interface Identifier This parameter specifies the interface identifier Time This parameter specifies the time in seconds 7 248 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware 7 249 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 7 250 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware 7 251 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 7 252 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware 7 253 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 7 254 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware 7 255 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 7 256 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware 7 257 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 7 258 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware 7 259 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 7 260 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware 7 261 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 7 262 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware 7 263 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 7 264 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware 7 265 Superblade Netwo
80. 0 0 0 1 o Gons o o o 0 0 0 o 0 de oi 1 o Gos o o o o o o 0 o 0 al ea 1 o Gons o o o o o o 0 o o o o o 1 o Ed 0 o o o o 0 o o o o o o 1 0 Ex02 0 o o 0 o 0 o o CCC 1 o Ex03 0 o o o o o 9 o CHER ET 1 0 Clicking the ETHERNET tab brings up the ETHERNET STATISTICS page Figure 7 168 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 136 7 188 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 136 Ethernet Statistics Page Parameters Index FCS Errors Multiple Collision Frames Deferred Transmissions Excess Collisions Carrier Sense Errors Received Internal MAC Errors Duplex Status This parameter specifies the port index This parameter specifies the number of packets received with checksum errors This parameter specifies the number of frames received with multiple collisions This parameter specifies the number of frames deferred for transmissions due to network sense This parameter specifies the number of excess collisions detected Excessive Collisions describe the situation where a station has tried 16 times to transmit without success and discards the frame This means that there is excessive traffic on the network and this must be reduced This parameter specifies the number of carrier sense errors This parameter specifies the number of MAC received errors This parameter specifies the current status of duplex 7 189 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual
81. 0 11 22 19 M 18 MERE ED Home System Mgmt System Settings File Management Firmware Upgrade Management Security Syslog ACL Web Settings SNMP Stack x Layer2 Mgmt Layer2 Basic Settings Port Manager VLAN Dynamic VLAN RSTP MSTP LA 802 1x Fiters Layer3 Mgmt multicast gt Statistics Gi0 1 G0 CIST Settings Gi0 1 Ex05 Status Port Status Migration Status Role TCN 200000000 128 Auto False Enable Faise 2 True False False q0 2 200000000 128 Auto False v Enable False 2 True vw False False GAS 200000000 128 Auto False Enable False 2 True False v False G04 200000000 128 Auto False Enable False 2 True False False Gi0 5 200000000 128 Auto False Enable False 2 True False False Gi06 200000000 128 Auto False Enable False 2 True vw False False GOT 200000000 128 Auto False Enable False 2 True False False Giog 200000000 128 Auto False Enable False 2 True False False Gi0 9 200000000 128 Auto False Enable False 2 True gt False False Gi0 10 200000000 128 Auto False Enable False 2 True v False False v Gi0 11 200000000 128 Auto False gt Enable False 2 True False False v GIZ 200000000 128 Auto False Enable False 12 True False False Gi0 13 200000000 128 Auto False
82. 02 1X Supplicant Statistics on page 7 215 Mac Session Statistics on page 7 216 802 1X Session Statistics Figure 7 186 802 1x Session Statistics Page 802 1x Session Statistics Gi0 1 Ex0 3 i Ad BIS Slats LIT Ea Ed E4 E Clicking the SESSION STATS tab brings up the 802 1X SESSION STATISTICS page Figure 7 186 which displays 802 1x statistics information The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 155 Table 7 155 802 1x Session Statistics Page Parameters This parameter specifies the port index Received Frames This parameter specifies the number of packets received Session Time secs This parameter specifies the session time in seconds 7 214 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 155 802 1x Session Statistics Page Parameters Continued Parameter Description Session Terminate Cause This parameter specifies the reason for session termination User Name This parameter specifies the name of the user authenticated 802 1X Supplicant Statistics Figure 7 187 802 1x Supplicant Session Statistics Page SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM X2C sus 802 1x Supplicant Session Statistics pone ar Mgmt Gi0 1 Ex0 3 gt Layers Mgmt gt Multicast Eapol Eapol Eapol Start Eapol Logoff Eapol Respid Eapol Resp Eapol Re apol Req Invalid Eapol Eap LenErr Last Eapol Last Eapol re Ge Ge ee GIE N NN Radus Gol o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00
83. 1 are connected to the CMM module s Ethernet port and the third port eth2 is connected to all 24 switching ports Only one port is enabled at any time The regular configuration setup switch is managed through the CMM Ethernet port Thus for regular deployment the RADIUS server should be located where it can be reached from the CMM Ethernet port 6 26 Chapter 6 1 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware 802 1x Configuration SUPERMICRO m E 802 1x Help System Port Statistics C Glcbal Radius Setting Raidus Server IP Address UDP Port Number 1812 Shared Secret Apply Global Settings L Management J Spanning Tree Port Set Status Show Client MAC Authorization 01 Disabled NIA IGMP Snooping i A Cable Diagnostic 82 0 Seanad Ni Password os bisabiea NA Logout 04 Disabled N A 05 Disabled N A 06 Disabled N A 07 Disabled N A ng M Nieahlad Nua mj To configure 802 1x port based access control click on the 802 1x folder in the left hand side bar The 802 1X configuration should display as shown in Figure 6 20 Check the GLOBAL RADIUS SETTING dialog box to enable 802 1x port based access control Radius Server IP Address This indicates the IP address of the RADIUS server UDP Port Number This specifies the UDP port number of the EAPOL control frame 1812 is the default UDP port number If the RADIUS server can t rec
84. 1 to 0 n When the switch is in stacking mode the interfaces are numbered as lt switch id gt 1to lt switch id n In non stacking mode the switch ID is considered to be 0 In the stacking mode any firmware upgrade in the Master Switch will automatically initiate a firmware upgrade to all attached stack member switches Firmware upgrade confirmation from stack member switches will be displayed in the Master Switch management interface Also in the stacking mode the user can reload all stacked switches or any selected stack member switch from the master management interface The interface numbers change between stacking and non stacking cases due to the switch ID So configurations saved for stacking are not valid for non stacking cases and vice versa NOTE If you choose stacking using the stack command from a non stacking case and the configurations are already saved for restoring the switch it will f rename the configuration file by adding a suffix _nonstack and will not restore this file when the switch reboots with stacking enabled Similarly if you choose non stacking using the no stack command from the stacking case and the configurations are already saved for restoring the switch it will rename the configuration file by adding a suffix _stack and will not restore this file when the switch reboots with stacking disabled Adding Stacking Members Connect the stacked switches using stacking cables For better redunda
85. 11 through 14 are not connected Temperature and voltage of the pass through module are read through the CMM module Like other SuperBlade network modules this pass through module is hot pluggable 7 NOTE The SBM IBP D14 InfniBand Pass through Module must be connected to another InfiniBand module in order to operate r 4 6 Installation and Configuration of InfiniBand Switch Modules This section covers the installation removal and configuration of InfiniBand switch modules and InfiniBand pass through modules Installing Removing the InfiniBand Switch Module Before installing the InfiniBand switch module make sure the cover to the module has been installed before proceeding Refer to the anti static precautions described in Chapter 2 The InifiniBand switch module must be installed into a double wide bay Assuming that you have already created a double wide bay out of two single wide bays continue with the steps below See the SuperBlade User s Manual for details on setting up double wide bays in the SuperBlade enclosure Chapter 4 InfiniBand Modules NOTE The 10GbE Pass through module SBM XEM 002 also requires the same double wide bay as the InfiniBand switch module and may be installed f instead of the InfiniBand switch module in your blade enclosure system Use the same instructions below for installing either the pass through module or the InfiniBand switch module Installing the Module 1 Remove the dummy co
86. 21 which sets the filter configuration to control the unicast packets that the switch needs to process The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 13 Table 7 68 L2 Unicast Filter Configuration Page Parameters FDB ID This parameter specifies the forwarding database ID Receive Port This parameter specifies the port on which the packet was received 7 106 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 68 L2 Unicast Filter Configuration Page Parameters Continued You can choose to set this configuration to any one of the following types Other For entries currently in use but whose conditions remain different from the following values Permanent Entries that reside even after the restart of the switch DeleteOnReset This deletes the entry on restart DeleteOnTimeout This deletes the entry on expiration of the ageing timer Status Multicast Filters Figure 7 93 L2 Multicast Filter Configuration Page L2 Multicast Filter Configuration Clicking the MULTICAST FILTERS tab brings up the L2 MULTICAST FILTER CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 21 which allows you to set the filter configuration to control the multicast packets that the switch needs to process The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 13 7 107 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 69 L2 Multicast Filter Configuration Page Parameters Parameter VLAN ID MAC Address Receive
87. 3 Setup and Installation Figure 3 2 Blade Enclosure with 1 10 Gbps Switch Modules Installed SBM GEM X2C Switch Modules SBM XEM 002 Pas 5 Push the release handle to the closed position NOTE After the module has been installed and the handle locked it will turn on and a POST test will run to verify it is working properly If there are no problems the blue Init OK LED on the module will illuminate and you will see an OK pa under INITIATED in the GBE SWITCH screen of the management software utility NOTE If the module is installed in a top bay it must be positioned upside down Removing a Switch Module 1 Pull out the release handle to the open position 2 Pull the module out of the bay 3 Replace immediately with another module or with a dummy module cover to maintain airflow integrity 3 3 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 3 2 Configuring the Switch Module Figure 3 3 Configuring the Switch Module Blade 10 Via Command Line Via Management Utility directly to GbE switch through CMM A Gigabit Ethernet switch module can be configured using two methods as shown in Figure 3 3 You may configure it Through the web based management utility or IPMI via the CMM module Directly through a command line using a telnet interface or a serial console The management utility and IPMI access the switch module through the CMM module To access it directly use the command line N
88. 48 Local Preference on page 7 149 BGP Filter on page 7 151 Route Aggregations on page 7 152 Advanced BGP Configuration on page 7 153 BGP Community Management on page 7 154 BGP Basic Settings Figure 7 128 BGP Basic Settings Page BGP Basic Settings Note To enable BGP Functionality Route ReDistribution should be enabled Clicking the Basics tab brings up the BGP Basic SETTINGS page Figure 7 128 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 102 7 146 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 102 BGP Basic Settings Page Parameters Parameter Status AS Number Synchronization Overlap Router Policy Default Local Preference Advertisement of Non BGP Routes Always Compare MED Description This parameter specifies the BGP admin status Using this the protocol can be enabled disabled in the switch This parameter specifies the autonomous system to which the switch is connected which is a read only field The synchronization between IGP and BGP can be ensured by enabling this field This parameter represents the policy for handling overlapping routes When an overlapping route is received depending upon the configured policy either the less specific routes or most specific routes or both are installed in the RIB tree This parameter sets a preference value for the autonomous system path You can choose to advertise even the external non BGP routes by enabli
89. 6 17 when there are static entries in the table To search for a MAC address to see if it exists in the table or not enter the MAC ADDRESS and VID then click on LookuP button If the MAC address is in L2 ADDRESS table whether it is a static or a dynamic MAC address the result will be displayed To show all of MAC address in the L2 table click the SHOW link next to SHOW L2 ADDRESSES Figure 6 17 L2 Management Current Entries Screen L2 Address Management System Port Show L2 Addresses SHOW m Statistics VLAN Trunking Address Lookup MAC 00 00 00 00 00 00 VID 1 Mirror QoS Static Address ADD Rate item SourceMAC VID Port Trunk RTag Delete o 00 30 48 8c e442 1 1 o O DELETE Spanning Tree 802 1x IGMP Snooping 6 20 Chapter 6 1 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware 6 10 Spanning Tree The Spanning Tree Protocol STP helps to detect and prevents loops from occurring on a switched or bridged network When multiple paths exist on a network STP will configure the network to use the most efficient path between network devices All other paths are forced into a blocked standby state If the active path fails then STP will automatically select another path to become the active path on the network to sustain normal network operations An active path is selected by comparing path costs defined on each path The path with the lowest cost will be sel
90. 7 194 SNMP StatistiCS RA N OE drena 7 196 Ne EE OE ER EE OE ey 7 196 SNMP AgentX RE EE EE ER OR ees 7 197 VLAN ER AE OE A EE 7 198 C rrent D SE td ltda EE lhe ER N 7 199 VLAN Port StatisticS iss Es EE ee i GE Ed GEE ei 7 200 VLAN Multicast Table 7 201 VLAN Counter Statistics ee ee Re ee ee 7 202 VLAN Capabilities cessation Re ee Re ee RA ee a 7 203 VLAN FDB Entries iese dd Ses es eek celine lls eth Ee se Ee ed 7 204 RSTP Statistical las ii A ee db daa 7 205 RSTP Information 7 205 RSTP Port Statistics eii tadaa ee ee ee ee 7 206 SAO ELS ER it AR NS 7 208 MSTP Information seen Es EE a dete 7 208 MSTP CIST Statist CS ss EERS li ne least lui 7 209 MSTP MSTI Port Statistics Re ee Ee ee ee ee ee 7 210 Link Aggregation LA 7 211 LA Port StatiStiCS is ie ee ee iii da dd 7 212 LA Neighbor Statistics 7 213 Table of Contents 8021X CR HE EE EE EE EE OE N 7 214 802 1X Session Statistics ee ee Re ee ee ee ee 7 214 802 1X Supplicant Statistics 7 215 Mac Session Statistics 7 216 la EET N RE AO te nn An ere a 7 218 ARP Cache Es SN it EE Ee ee 7 218 ICMP Statistics 7 219 er NE ER A AS 7 221 IP V6 Interface Statistics ees ee ee ee ee Re ee ee ee ee ee ee 7 221 IGMP V6 Statistics ss ARE SE EE Ss GE RE nl 7 223 SA ER N OR ND 7 225 io OE a hs OE N EES 7 226 RIP6 Interface Statistics 7 226 RIP6 Route Information 7 227 OSPE SAD
91. 7 236 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware IGMP Snooping V1 V2 Statistics Figure 7 202 IGMP Snooping V1 V2 Statistics Page Refresh Support Help About Log Out SWITCH SBM GEM X2C sms ES er NET IGMP Snooping V1 V2 Statistics Home gt System Mgmt Layer2 Mgmt Layer3 Mgmt RIPng OSPF OSPFv3 IGMP Snooping IGMP PIM DVMRP Clicking the IGS STATISTICS tab brings up the IGMP SNOOPING V1 V2 STATISTICS page Figure 7 202 which displays IGMP snooping statistics The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 171 Table 7 171 IGMP Snooping V1 V2 Statistics Page Parameters Parameter VLAN ID General Queries Received Group Queries Received Group and Source Queries Received IGMP Reports Received IGMP Leaves Received IGMP Packets Dropped General Queries Transmitted Group Queries Transmitted IGMP Reports Transmitted IGMP Leaves Transmitted Description This parameter specifies the VLAN identifier This parameter specifies the number of general guery packets received This parameter specifies the number of group query packets received This parameter specifies the number of group and source query packets received This parameter specifies the number of IGMP report packets received This parameter specifies the number of IGMP leave packets received This parameter specifies the number of IGMP dackets dropped This parameter specifies the number of general query p
92. 7 56 Port Monitoring Page Port Monitoring Gi0 1 Ex0 3 Clicking the PORT MONITORING tab brings up the PORT MONITORING page Figure 7 56 which allows you to enable or disbale monitoring on port interface The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 39 Table 7 39 Port Monitoring Page Parameters This parameter enables or disables the port monitoring Receive Monitoring This parameter enables or disables the receive monitoring 7 67 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual VLAN Traffic Class Figure 7 57 VLAN Traffic Class Mapping Page SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM X2C sms CE ETT Home VLAN Traffic Class Mapping System Mgmt system Settings File Management Gi0 1 Ex0 3 Firmware Upgrade Management Security oe Priority Priority P ee AGENT EE Goo Mo 1 1 2 2 3 os Goa o 0 1 1 12 02 3 3 id GOB 0 0 1 1 2 2 a 3 Layer2 Mgmt G4 0 0 1 1 12 2 03 En gt ren ss GOS 0 0 1 1 12 W2 W W gt Dynamic VLAN Dg O Ed Did Ed CN EN E RSTP lt gt lt lt Ee GOT 0 0 1 2 2 3 3 Sard GOS 0 0 1 1 2 42 3 3 fiers G09 0 0 1 1 12 12 03 a gt Layer3 Mgmt E Sinica o Mo 1 1 2 2 3 a gt Statistics GOILO 0 1 1 12 W2 W3 W3 Gi0 12 0 0 1 1 12 12 03 3 Gi0 13 0 0 1 w oo 02 13 3 Gi0 14 0 0 1 2 2 3 3 gt GOS 0 0 1 2 2 3 a Goig 0 0 1 1 12 12 03 03 EXO 1 0 0 1 M2 12 03 03 O 0 1 1 12 12 03 03 gt
93. 73 siese ele le AA RE AR EE OER OR 7 74 Port Protocol RR AR EE EO eae 7 74 Vian Port MAG ER RE IE ER N ERA 7 75 Unicast MAG RARE ad ci 7 76 el RA N ne M Aa EE OR EE EE 7 77 Switch Port WLAN Se ihe is A RO ENE AE N 7 78 Dynamic Vlan EE AR OR EE EE ER 7 79 Dynamic VLAN Global Configuration 7 79 Port Configuration EE criticar iaeia 7 80 GARPTIMerSs sinus Ne dit enh e dd 7 81 ae RA EE OOR EE RE EE EA 7 82 RSIP GlobalSetlingsi EE is rain GR ee ke ee Ee 7 82 ASTP Basic Settings i es SEKER dial 7 83 Port Settings is dae it ee ee et lo neal eo eee 7 84 LOINEN re OANE A OR OE sete antes 7 85 MERE OE da AE techie Rated 7 86 MSTP Basic Settings 2 EE enced scecsseedcdasdoshecdcescevessacuhasstisaaeetiendvapens 7 86 MSTP Timers it gee dd inner ane a 7 88 Port Configuration sr EE mets fie ie here net die ce 7 89 VLAN Mapping EE EE DA ER KOR EE EE OT 7 90 ee OO N Ee T 7 91 CIST Port Stat S sii cies On EE Ee oe Ee ee ROER Er Gee De ds 7 92 BERE ER EE OR ER OR RA 7 94 LA Basic Settings OE ER ee We ea GER ae ane eis 7 94 Interface Settings RR EE Met aah cece peat OR ta Saaie EASAN aE 7 95 edel TR OE EE EE EE eed 7 96 Port Settings EE RR EK 7 97 Port State Infos wis AR RR AO OE EE tr 7 98 Load Balancing miosina 7 99 es RR el N EE EE EE IE nee 7 100 Basic Settings AR EA ER IE EE 7 100 Port Settings ER GE ge ee Ee at ai eee 7 101 TIMO AE AE EE EE N EE EO EE ER 7 103 Local AS sitet hi ite th Gta a ae ae 7 104 Superblade Network Modu
94. 768 80 00 0030 48230003 8007 0 8000003048230003 32768 0 SharedLan Disabled Discarding Mm Gi0 8 80 00 00 30 48 23 00 03 32768 80 00 0030 48 230003 80 08 0 0 00 00 30 48 a3 00 03 32768 0 SharedLan Disabled Discarding 802 1x Gi0 9 80 00 00 30 48 a3 00 03 32768 80 00 00 30 48 a3 00 03 80 09 0 80 00003048230003 32768 0 SharedLan Disabled Discarding Payers Mgmt Gi0 10 80 00 00 30 48 23 00 03 32768 80 00 003048230003 80 08 0 80 00 00 30 48 23 00 03 32768 o SharedLan Disabled Discarding asar IGi0 11 80 00 00 30 48 23 00 03 32768 80 00 00 30 48 a3 00 03 SOP 0 80 00 0030 48 2300 03 32768 0 SharedLan Disabled Discarding Gi0 12 80 00 00 30 4823 00 03 32768 0 00 00 30 48 a3 00 03 BODE 0 80 00 00 30 48 03 00 03 32768 O SharedLan Disabled Discarding IGi0 13 0 00 0030 48 23 0003 32768 0 00 00 3048 a3 0003 800d 0 80 00 00 30 48 a3 00 03 32768 0 SharedLan Disabled Discarding Gi0 14 80 00 00 30 48 03 00 03 32768 80 0000304 230003 800e 0 80 00 003048230003 32768 O SharedLan Disabled Discarding IGi0 15 80 00 0030 48 a3 00 03 32768 80 00 00 30 48 a3 00 03 80 0f 0 80 00 0030 48 3 00 03 32768 SharedLan Disabled Discarding Gi0 16 0 00 0030 4890 00 e2 32768 80 00 00 30 48 a3 00 03 80 10 200000000 80 00 0030 48 23 0003 32768 O PointtoPoint Designated Forwarding Ex0 1 80 00 0030 48 23 0003 32768 80 00003048230003 80 19 0 80 00 00 30 48 23 00 03 32768 O SharedLan Disabled Discarding Ex0 2 0 00 0030 48 23 0003 32768 80 00 003048 230003 80 la 0 80 00 003048230003 32768
95. AN Counter Statistics Figure 7 176 VLAN Counter Statistics Page VLAN Counter Statistics Clicking the COUNTER STATISTICS link brings up the VLAN COUNTER STATISTICS page Figure 7 176 which displays VLAN counters The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 145 Table 7 145 VLAN Counter Statistics Page Parameters VLAN ID This parameter specifies the VLAN identifier Mcast Bcast Frames Rx This parameter specifies the number of non unicast packets received Unicast frames Tx This parameter specifies the number of unicast packets transmitted 7 202 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware VLAN Capabilities Figure 7 177 VLAN Capabilities Page VLAN Capabilities Clicking the CAPABILITIES tab brings up the VLAN CAPABILITIES page Figure 7 177 which displays the VLAN capabilities of the switch The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 146 Table 7 146 VLAN Capabilities Page Parameters Extended Filtering Services This parameter specifies the number of extended filtering services Static Entry Individual port This parameter specifies the number of Static Entry Individual ports SVL capable This parameter specifies the number of SVL capables Configurable PVID Tagging This parameter specifies the number of Configurable PVID taggings 7 203 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual VLAN FDB Entries Figure 7 178 VLAN FDB Entries Page VLAN FD
96. Area Figure 7 126 OSPFv3 Area Settings Page Help About Log Out SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM X2C sms OSPFv3 Area Settings Home gt System Mgmt gt Layer2 Mgmt Area ID MEE Type Normal ES nhs Area Summary No Area Summary DHCP Server Stub Metric DHCP Relay a NSSA Translator Role Aways OSPF NSSA Stability Interval 40 OSPFx3 BGP Stub Metric Type OSPF Metic Anby ADD Reset RP gt Multicast gt Statistics a ao O Stub Metric Type OSPFMetic Nssa N Stub Metric Translator Role Interval 0 0 00 Normal Send Area Summary 1 Candidate 40 Delete Clicking the AREA tab brings up the OSPFv3 AREA SETTINGS page Figure 7 126 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 100 Table 7 100 OSPFv3 Area Settings Page Parameters Parameter Area ID Type Area Summary Stub Metric NSSA Translator Role NSSA Stability Interval Stub Metric Type Description This parameter uniquely identifies an area This parameter indicates whether an area is a Stub area NSSA or Standard normal area This parameter controls the import of Inter Area LSAs into stub areas This can be noAreaSummary or sendAreaSummary This parameter indicates the metric value advertised for the default route into Stub area and NSSA This parameter specifies the NSSA Border router s ability to perform NSSA translation of type 7 LSAs into type 5 LSAs This parameter specifies the nu
97. B Entries Clicking the FDB ENTRIES tab brings up the VLAN FDB ENTRIES page Figure 7 178 which displays VLAN filter database entries The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 147 Table 7 147 VLAN FDB Entries Page Parameters This parameter specifies the VLAN identifier This parameter specifies the Index of port where this entry is learned 7 204 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware RSTP Statistics The RSTP STATISTICS link allows you to view RSTP statistics through the following pages RSTP Information on page 7 205 RSTP Port Statistics on page 7 206 RSTP Information Figure 7 179 RSTP Information Page RSTP Information Clicking the INFORMATION tab brings up the RSTP INFORMATION page Figure 7 179 which displays RSTP statistics The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 148 Table 7 148 RSTP Information Page Parameters Protocol Specification This parameter specifies the Protocol Specification Designated Root This parameter specifies the designated root bridge address Root Cost This parameter specifies the cost to root 7 205 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 148 RSTP Information Page Parameters Continued Parameter Description Max Age This parameter specifies the max age in seconds Hello Time This parameter specifies the Hello time in seconds Hold Time This parameter specifies the hold time in sec
98. Basic Settings Page Clicking the INTERFACE SETTINGS tab brings up the PORT CHANNEL INTERFACE BASIC SETTINGS page Figure 7 82 which allows you to configure port channels The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 60 Table 7 60 Port Channel Interface Basic Settings Page Parameters Port Channel ID This parameter specifies the identifier of the port channel interface The 9 a valids values are between 7 to 65535 This parameter specifies the MTU value for this port channel 7 95 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Port Channel Figure 7 83 LA Port Channel Settings Page ort Setti teint LA Port Channel Settings Clicking the PORT CHANNEL SETTINGS tab brings up the LA PORT CHANNEL SETTINGS page Figure 7 83 which is used to edit the Port Channel configuration The first table is for creating Port Channel interfaces while the second table is for editing the Port Channel configuration The third table is used to display the Port Channels and to delete the existing Port Channels The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 61 Table 7 61 LA Port Channel Settings Page Parameters Port Channel ID This parameter specifies the identifier of the port channel interface This parameter specifies the interface indices that must be configured to Ports be members of the Port Channel This parameter specifies the MAC Address that is assigned to the port channel For this the MAC selectio
99. COctet This parameter displays the number of bytes transmitted with HC NOTE HC refers to the High Capacity value of the counter used The regular counter is 32 bit The HC counter is 64 bit r Reload Figure 7 52 System Settings Page Reload SWITCH 1 LED STATUS System Settings Switch Switch Y OForce ET NN Restart of switch required Sparse Y if these values are changed Based A Switch Reload function Figure 7 52 is available in the SYSTEM SETTINGS page in the SYSTEM MANAGEMENT section You can use the SwITCH select option to choose the switch to reload or you can select the ALL SWITCHES option to reload all stack member switches The FORCE check box provides an option to force a reload of the switch when the Master Switch is waiting for confirmation messages from slave switches for stacking configurations Click the RELOAD SWITCH button to reload the selected switch 7 62 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware 7 5 Layer 2 Management The LAYER2 MANAGEMENT page Figure 7 53 has links to all pages with Layer2 controls Figure 7 53 Layer2 Management Page Welcome to the Layer2 Management Page The various layer2 features of the Supermicro Switch can be configured through the links available in this page ate Laver Basic Settings ae configure MAC address Port Manager X configure all physical ports VLAN configure PVID static and dynamic vians ee Dynami
100. E STATS tab brings up the PIM INTERFACE STATISTICS page Figure 7 205 which displays PIM interface statistics The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 174 Table 7 174 PIM Interface Statistics Page Parameters Address si This parameter specifies the address This parameter specifies the version 7 241 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 174 PIM Interface Statistics Page Parameters Continued Neighbor Count This parameter specifies the neighbor count DR address This parameter specifies the DR address PIM Neighbor Statistics Figure 7 206 PIM Neighbor Statistics Page PIM Neighbor Statistics i i EE Clicking the NEIGHBOR STATS tab brings up the PIM NEIGHBOR STATISTICS page Figure 7 206 which displays PIM neighbor statistics The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 175 Table 7 175 PIM Neighbor Statistics Page Parameters This parameter specifies the neighbor This parameter specifies the uptime This parameter specifies the version 7 242 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 175 PIM Neighbor Statistics Page Parameters Continued Mode This parameter specifies the mode Override Interval This parameter specifies the override interval PIM BSR Info Figure 7 207 PIM BSR Info Page PIM BSR Info AE A Clicking the BSR INFO tab brings up the PIM BSR INFO page Figure 7 207 The parameters for this page are show
101. EDS i esse esse esse ee ee ee ge ee B 3 Table B 5 SBM IBS Q3616 M InfiniBand Switch LEDS eee esse ee ee ee B 4 Preface About this Manual This manual is written for professional system integrators Information Technology professionals service personnel and technicians It provides information for the installation and use of Supermicro s network modules Installation and maintenance should be performed by experienced professionals only Manual Organization Chapter 1 Introduction The first chapter provides an overview of this manual Chapter 2 System Safety You should familiarize yourself with this chapter for a general overview of safety precautions that should be followed when installing and servicing Superblade Network Modules Chapter 3 Setup and Installation Refer here for details on installing the modules into a SuperBlade enclosure and for their setup and configuration Chapter 4 InfiniBand Modules This chapter details the InfiniBand modules and their features Chapter 5 Ethernet Modules This chapter details all Ethernet switches and pass through modules for the SuperBlade system Chapter 6 1 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware This chapter details 1 Gb switch firmware menus and screens and how to use them Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware This chapter details 1 10 Gb switch firmware menus and screens and how to use them Appendix A HCA Mezzanine Cards This appendix details the HCA mezz
102. Enable False 2 True False False GiO 14 200000000 128 Auto y False v Enable False 12 True Fi False Gi 1S 200000000 128 Auto False Enable False 2 True False False GiO 16 200000000 128 Auto False Enable False 2 True False False Ex0 1 200000000 128 Auto False Enable False 12 True False False Ex0 2 200000000 128 Auto y False v Enable False 12 True False False Ex0 3__ 200000000 128 Auto False Enable i False 12 True vlFalse False Clicking the PORT CONFIGURATION tab brings up the CIST SETTINGS page Figure 7 77 which sets the configuration per Port related to MSTP The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 55 Table 7 55 CIST Settings Page Parameters Parameter Port Admin Status Priority Path Cost Protocol Migration Edge Status Point to Point Status Hello Time Seconds Description This parameter specifies the port identifier This parameter specifies the MSTP protocol status that can be enabled disabled on the particular port This parameter specifies the port priority used in role selection This parameter specifies the path cost associated with this port This parameter controls the migration among MSTP RSTP and STP protocols if the other side of the switch runs a different mode Migration takes place only if this is enabled This parameter must be configured if the correspo
103. F Area Aggregation Figure 7 122 OSPF Area Aggregation Page OSPF Area Aggregation Clicking the AGGREGATION tab brings up the OSPF AREA AGGREGATION page Figure 7 122 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 96 Table 7 96 OSPF Area Aggregation Page Parameters This parameter specifies the area associated with the OSPF address Area ID range It is specified as an IP address Network This parameter specifies the network address This parameter specifies the advertise option as Advertise Matching or Do Advertise Not Advertise Matching 7 137 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual External Aggregation Figure 7 123 OSPF As External Aggregation Configuration Page Aogregi OSPF As External Aggregation Configuration Clicking the EXT AGGREGATION tab brings up the OSPF As EXTERNAL AGGREGATION CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 123 which allows you to configure OSPF external aggregation parameters The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 97 Table 7 97 OSPF As External Aggregation Configuration Page Parameters Network This parameter specifies the external network address Area ID This parameter specifies the Area identifier 7 138 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 97 OSPF As External Aggregation Configuration Page Parameters Translation This parameter enables or disables the translation 7 139 Superblade Network Modules User
104. FIGURATION page Figure 7 13 This page allows you to configure the RADIUS server parameters as shown in Table 7 4 Table 7 4 Radius Server Configuration Page Parameters Response Time secs Use this parameter to specify the secret string which is to be shared shared Secret between the Radius Server and the Radius Client 7 17 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual TACACS Global Settings Figure 7 14 TACACS Global Settings Page Tacacs Global Setti EE Apply The TACACS GLOBAL SETTINGS page Figure 7 14 allows you to configure TACACS retries and choose an active TACACS server The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 5 Table 7 5 TACACS Global Settings Page Parameters This parameter specifies the IP address of the active TACACS server This Active Server IP Address server should have been already configured in the following TACACS SERVER CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 15 7 18 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware TACACS Server Configuration Figure 7 15 TACACS Server Configuration Page Tacacs Server Configuration Clicking the TACACS SERVERS tab brings up the TACACS SERVER CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 15 which allows you to configure TACACS servers The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 6 Table 7 6 TACACS Server Configuration Page Parameters IP Address This parameter specifies the IP address of the TACACS server Specify Yes
105. Ge GR GR Re GR RR 6 12 Geo TOORN ES RE EE Ee GE N ee EG ee ee ee EE ee 6 13 6 6 MNO EE ER EE NE EE a OOR EE st 6 15 6 7 Quality of Service ee ee Ge RR Ge GR GR Re Ge Ge RR Ge Ge RR ee Ge GR RR 6 16 Priority QUOUeS ia RE ee ee cnica 6 16 6 8 Rate Control RE EE OE OE EE EE 6 18 6 9 L2 Management 6 19 6 10 Spanning Tree ee se Re Ge Ge ER Re Ge GR ek GR Ge GR RR Ge Ge RR Ge Ge GR RR 6 21 Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU ese ee Re Re Re Re ee 6 21 Port Transition State Ee es REEKSE dai 6 22 RSIP Port Roles sise usine da 6 22 Root STATUS ARE AE ed id 6 24 Bridge Selina OR EE 6 24 RSTP Port Settings c citamos 6 25 Table of Contents 6 41 IEEE 802X AE RE EN EE 6 26 Wiring for 802 iii A A te A 6 26 802 1x Configuration dite nt items 6 27 6 12 IGMP Snooping 6 28 619 SNMP coto AE ER OR aaah 6 30 6 14 UpLink Failure Tracking ULFT ees ee se ee GR Re GR Ge Re ek 6 31 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware 7 1 Pa WOVEIVIOW ner LD SEE ET trie 7 1 Nomenclature el i ener a sn a eee 7 2 Evan OQINS RE RR RE DE N A tee ANT cen EE Nm nt Be anne 7 2 7 3 Home de EE aa 7 3 Top Page Links sean koe i deat ete eld ad 7 6 TOP LED DIS oa nest OE EE OE RE 7 6 LetESide Tree EE aia Paste HER RA EE ds 7 6 Middle Configuration Link Table 7 7 7 4 System Management Page ie ee ee RR Re Ge GR RR Ge Ge RR 7 7 System Setas ss EE rte 7 9 Syste
106. ID Interface vlan lt 192 168100 1 gt y Primary IP Address k Priority Authentication Type no Authentication Authentication Key Advertisement Interval secs 1 Pre emption Enable ADD Reset Virwat Router interface Primary IP Priority Authentication Type Authentication Key Advertisement Interval secs Pre emption State Status Clicking the VRRP SETTINGS link brings up the VRRP SETTINGS page The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 117 VRRP Settings Page Parameters Parameter Virtual Router ID Interface Primary IP Address Priority Authentication Type Authentication Key Advertisement Interval Seconds Preempt Mode State Status Description This parameter indicates the Virtual ID associated with each Virtual Router This parameter represents the interface on which the Virtual Router must be configured This parameter specifies the PRIMARY IP ADDRESS for the Virtual Router This parameter indicates the PRIORITY for the Virtual Router The configurable priority value ranges from 1 to 254 This parameter indicates the AUTHENTICATION TYPE for the Virtual Router This parameter indicates the AUTHENTICATION KEY for the Virtual Router This parameter specifies the time Interval in seconds for sending the advertisement packets This parameter enablesor disables the PREEMPT MODE This parameter indicates the current state of the Virtual Router This parameter
107. IGMP is a standard defined in RFC1112 for IGMPv1 and in RFC2236 for IGMPv2 IGMP specifies how a host can register a router in order to receive specific multicast traffic A layer 3 switch usually supports Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP to manage multicast groups by sending and processing IGMP packets To prevent the unnecessary flooding the gigabit layer 2 switch can enable the GMP snooping function to control how IP multicast packets are forwarded to required ports by monitoring IGMP queries and response packets generated by layer 3 switches or the IGMP querier Currently the gigabit switch supports IGMP snooping for IGMP v1 v2 packets In the real network setup the switch is seated between the Multicast Router Server and the host The Multicast Router Server will periodically send an IGMP v2 query packet and the host will respond with an IGMP v2 report packet if the host is in the same multicast group When the host wants to go away it can send an IGMP v2 Leave packet The switch will remove the connected port number from the multicast group entry of a table If the host is just silently removed then the switch will clean it from table when the timer expires Figure 6 21 shows the IGMP SNOOPING configuration screen Table 6 8 describes each configuration item 6 28 Chapter 6 1 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Figure 6 21 IGMP Snoopin Q ao creen SUPERMICR IGMP Snooping System Port Statistics
108. InfiniBand Switch Module eie ee 4 6 Installing Removing the InfiniBand Pass Through Module 4 7 InfiniBand Switch LEDs 4 8 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Blade Software for Access to InfiniBand Switch Module 4 8 Chapter 5 Ethernet Modules 5 1 5 1 SBM GEM 001 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Module 5 1 LED eis el RE EE HERE etre ie feet leash 5 2 SR N EL di ca anes 5 2 5 2 SBM GEM X2C 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Module 5 3 LED Re rei ER EE OE ue dado 5 4 POrIS RR nine se ta ER AR OE EE anti ee 5 4 5 3 SBM GEM 002 1Gb Ethernet Pass through Module 5 5 5 4 SBM XEM 002 SBM XEM 002M 10 Gb Ethernet Pass through Module mos EE PRE AA OR RD EE RU nn 5 6 5 5 SBM GEP T20 1Gb Ethernet Pass through Module for Twin Blade Modules is NE eet ER RR es GR GR Mea EE a e 5 8 Chapter 6 1 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware 6 1 6 1 SBM GEM 001 Firmware Features and Functions 6 1 6 1 Port StalU is EE ree Re ER EE enr dit 6 4 Port VLAN ID PVID icc es activates nantes hig ae leat etn 6 5 Jumbo Frames Support ese ee RA rae Re ee Re ee Re ee 6 5 Port Gonfigurati ss sei Eg died ia 6 5 SEN OE RO EA eae 6 7 PortStatisti s ss toot e RE e ls tl 6 7 623 VLAN ie Ae RE Ne a 6 10 6 4 Configuring a Static VLAN ee ee ee Re ee Ge RR Ee
109. Link State Database Clicking the LINK STATE DATABASE tab brings up the OSPF LINK STATE DATABASE page Figure 7 197 which displays information about OSPF link state database The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 166 Table 7 166 OSPF Link State Database Page Parameters Area ID This parameter specifies the area identifier Link State ID This parameter specifies the link state identifier This parameter specifies the sequence number of this link state Sequence information 7 230 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 166 OSPF Link State Database Page Parameters Continued Parameter Description Checksum This parameter specifies the checksum Age This parameter specifies the link state information age in seconds 7 231 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual OSPFv3 The OSPFv3 link allows you to view OSPF v3 statistics through the following pages OSPFV3 Route Information on page 7 232 OSPFV3 Link State DB on page 7 233 OSPFV3 Route Information Figure 7 198 OSPFV3 Route Information Page OSPFv3 Route Information Clicking the OSPFV3 ROUTE INFORMATION tab brings up the OSPFV3 ROUTE INFORMATION page Figure 7 198 which displays information about OSPFV3 routes The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 167 Table 7 167 OSPFV3 Route Information Page Parameters Destination Address This parameter specifies the destination
110. N tato she AM LAE ne 7 229 OSPF Route Information ee ee ee ee Re ee ee ee ee ee 7 229 OSPF Link State DB 7 230 OSPEV8 EE o ES E ero ER es 7 232 OSPFV3 Route Information cccccccccesssssceceecssseeeeeecesseeeeeeeeees 7 232 OSPFV3 Link State DB 7 233 VRRP Statistics AE AE EN EN ass 7 234 IGMP Snooping RO IE EE EE EN 7 236 IGMP Snooping Clear Statistics 7 236 IGMP Snooping V1 V2 Statistics 7 237 IGMP Snooping V3 Statistics esse ee ee ee ee Re ee ee ee ke 7 238 IGMP Statistics vies RE Boa eee a AS 7 239 PIM PEL EE EE ESE EE EES GE EE 7 241 PIM Interface Statistics Ee ees DEE ects nan 7 241 PIM Neighbor Statistics 7 242 PIM BSRiIntots 0 io it Wein Shee eae ee 7 243 PIM RP Set Information ooocccccnnccoccnnnonoconcnoncnanoncnnncnnoonnnnncnonananonos 7 244 PIM Route Information ccconccccocononccccnnnnnnncnnononinnnnanananononononnnnonononoos 7 245 BA ld ER ho cabos alot AE Belk ie en Mat dar ENE 7 246 DVMRP Routers Es ER AE RD ae Se ek e EP ee o 7 246 DVMRP Multicast Routers sesse sees ee ee se ee se ee Ee Ee ee ee ee ee ee 7 247 DVMRP Prune Statistics 7 248 Appendix A HCA Mezzanine Cards A 1 A 1 Safety Guidelines A 1 ESD Safety Guidelines ee ee AR ee ee ae A 1 General Safety Guidelines A 1 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual A 2 Mezzanine HCA Cards see ee ee se ee ee ek
111. NGS tab brings up the PREFIX CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 104 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 79 Table 7 79 Prefix Configuration Page Parameters Parameter Interface VLAN ID Prefix Prefix Length Prefix Profile ID Description This parameter specifies the index of the VLAN Interface This parameter indicates the IPv6 address prefix to be advertised in RA This parameter indicates the PREFIX LENGTH in bits This parameter specifies index to the IPv6 address profile table 7 118 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware DHCP Server The DHCP Server link helps you to manage the DHCP server in the switch through the following two pages DHCP Basic Settings on page 7 119 Pool Settings on page 7 120 DHCP Basic Settings Figure 7 105 DHCP Basic Settings Page DHCP Basic Settings i Note To enable DHCP Server DHCP Relay Status should be disabled Clicking the DHCP SETTINGS tab brings up the DHCP Basic SETTINGS page Figure 7 105 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 80 Table 7 80 DHCP Basic Settings Page Parameters With this parameter you can enable or disable the DHCP server using this DRE Saver configuration ICMP Echo This parameter enables or disables the ICMP Echo feature 7 119 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Pool Settings Figure 7 106 DHCP Pool Settings Page DHCP Pool Settings Clicking
112. ON page Figure 7 157 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 126 Table 7 126 IGMP Source Information Page Parameters Group Address This parameter specifies the IP multicast group address Source Address This parameter represents the IP Source address 7 177 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual PIM The PIM link allows you to perform PIM related configuration through the following pages Basic Settings on page 7 178 Component on page 7 179 Interfaces on page 7 180 Candidate RPs on page 7 181 Threshold on page 7 182 Static RP on page 7 183 Basic Settings Figure 7 158 PIM Basic Settings Page PIM Basic Settings Note To enable PIM IGMP Proxy should be disabled Clicking the BASIC SETTINGS tab brings up the PIM Basic SETTINGS page Figure 7 158 which specifies the PIM status in the switch The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 127 Table 7 127 PIM Basic Settings Page Parameters PIM Status M allows you to enable or disable the PIM status in the 7 178 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 127 PIM Basic Settings Page Parameters Continued Registration Stop Rate This parameter specifies the registration stop rate limiting period in Limiting Period seconds Static RP This parameter allows you to enable or disable the Static RP in the switch Component Figure 7 159 PIM Component Configuration Page Clicking
113. ORT column indicates the port number of the switch The LINK STATUS column shows the current link status either up or down for each port The SPEED DUPLEX column indicates the link speed and duplex status for each port when it is linked up If the link is down there is no status shown on SPEED DUPLEX The FLow CONTROL column indicates that the state of flow control is either disabled or enabled for each port when it is linked up The JUMBO FRAMES column indicates that the state of jumbo frame support is either disabled or enabled for each port when it is linked up The PVID column shows the current default port VLAN ID for each switch port P NOTE In the figures BMB GEM 003 is the number of the Gigabit switch board it is not a separate model of switch r 6 4 Chapter 6 1 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Port VLAN ID PVID The PVID is used in a port based VLAN to allow assigning a port to belong to a VLAN A VLAN can then be configured to be a group of member ports This switch is an 802 1q tag aware switch If no VLANs are defined on the switch every port will be assigned to a default VLAN which has VLAN ID 1 Each port will have PVID equal to 1 If incoming frames are untagged they will be tagged with the default PVID of the port on which they are received The destination MAC address of the frame and the PVID will be used for forwarding decisions An incoming tagged frame will be kept intact The switch will use the
114. P Target Address This page allows you to configure SNMP target including TARGET NAME Settings on page 7 36 TARGET IP TRANSPORT TAG PARAM and STORAGE TYPE 7 31 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 15 SNMP Agent Configuration Pages Continued Configuration Page Description This setting allows you to configure SNMP target parameters including PARAMETER NAME MP MODEL SECURITY MODEL NAME LEVEL and STORAGE TYPE SNMP Target Parameter Settings on page 7 37 This setting allows you to configure SNMP security including user name AUTHENTICATION PROTOCOL AUTHENTICATION KEY PRIVACY PROTOCOL PRIVACY KEY and STORAGE TYPE SNMP User Settings on page 7 38 SNMP Trap Settings on _ This setting allows you to configure SNMP trap notifications including page 7 39 NOTIFY NAME NOTIFY TAG NOTIFY TYPE and STORAGE TYPE SNMP Community Settings Figure 7 26 SNMP Community Settings Page Refresh Support Help About Log Out SUPERMICR bai HEER SWITCH SBM GEM X2C SMIS SNMP Community Settings Home System Mgmt System Settings Community Index File Management Firmware Upgrade Community Name Management Security RE Syslog Security Name ACL Web Settings gt Spek Context Name AGEN pee Transport Tag RMON lath be Storage Type Volatile NTP DE Add Reset Layer2 Mgmt Layer3 Mgmt Setect Community index Community Name Security NamelContext Name Transpo
115. Page Parameters sesse ese esse ee eke 7 203 VLAN FDB Entries Page Parameters 7 204 RSTP Information Page Parameters cccceseeseeeeeeteeeeeeeees 7 205 RSTP Port Statistics Page Parameters iese ese sesse ee ee 7 206 MSTP Information Page Parameters esse ese see ee ee ke 7 208 MSTP CIST Port Statistics Page Parameters iese sesse ee 7 209 MSTP MSTI Port Statistics Page Parameters sesse ss ees 7 211 LA Port Statistics Page ParameterS iese ese see ee ee ke 7 212 LA Neighbor Statistics Information Page Parameters 7 213 802 1x Session Statistics Page Parameters sesse esse 7 214 802 1x Supplicant Session Statistics Page Parameters 7 215 MAC Session Statistics Page Parameters sesse esse ee ee 7 217 ARP Cache Page Parameters sesse ese see ee ee ee ee 7 218 ICMP Statistics Page Parameters 7 219 IPV6 Interface Statistics Page Parameters 7 221 ICMPv6 Statistics Page Parameters 7 223 RIP Interface Statistics Page Parameters 7 225 RIP6 Interface Statistics Page Parameters sesse esse ese 7 226 RIP6 Route Information Page Parameters secsec 7 227 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 165 OSPF Route Information Page Parameters 7 229 Table 7 166 OSPF Link State Database Page Parameters ss
116. RATION page Figure 7 155 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 124 Table 7 124 IGMP Interface Configuration Page Parameters Interface This parameter specifies the interface index With this parameter you can choose to run either in IGMP Version 1 IGMP Operating Version Version 2 or IGMP Version 3 This can be configured for every interface This parameter indicates the interval between two successive IGMP Query Interval queries Robustness Value This parameter specifies the ROBUSTNESS VALUE on this interface 7 175 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Group Information Figure 7 156 IGMP Group Configuration Page IGMP Group Configuration went gt EE A Ada Reset Note Source Address is useful only on IGMP v3 interfaces Clicking the GROUP INFORMATION tab brings up the IGMP GROUP CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 156 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 125 Table 7 125 IGMP Group Configuration Page Parameters Interface This parameter specifies the interface index This parameter represents the IP Source address Source Address NOTE Source configuration is allowed only when the operating version is v3 on this interface 7 176 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Source Information Figure 7 157 IGMP Source Information Page IGMP Source Information Clicking the SOURCE INFORMATION tab brings up the IGMP SOURCE INFORMATI
117. RICTED VLAN Registration REGISTRATION 7 80 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware GARP Timers Figure 7 70 Garp Timers Configuration Page Garp Timers Configuration Gi0 1 Ex0 3 i Clicking the GARP TIMERS tab brings up the GARP TIMERS CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 70 which displays the various parameters for changing Garp times The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 49 Table 7 49 Garp Timers Configuration Page Parameters This parameter displays the Port Number Garp Leave Time msecs This parameter allows you to change the Garp Leave Time 7 81 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual RSTP The RSTP link provides links to the following configuration pages RSTP Global Settings on page 7 82 e RSTP Basic Settings on page 7 83 e Port Settings on page 7 84 e Port Status on page 7 85 RSTP Global Settings Figure 7 71 Global Configuration Page Global Configuration fo EES ENTES ee Note To enable RSTP Functionality MSTP should be disabled and shutdown Clicking the GLOBAL SETTINGS tab brings up the GLOBAL CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 71 which allows you to configure RSTP global parameters The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 50 Table 7 50 Global Configuration Page Parameters System Control This parameter starts or Shutsdown RSTP in the switch Dynamic Path Cost This parameter allows you to enable or disabl
118. S which specifies the IP Address of the neighbor router to which the unicast update has to be sent 7 125 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Security Settings Figure 7 112 RIP Security Settings Page RIP Security Settings Clicking the SECURITY tab brings up the RIP SECURITY SETTING page Figure 7 112 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 13 Table 7 86 RIP Security Setting Page Parameters IP Address This parameter displays the active RIP interfaces You can select the interface for which you want to configure authentication This parameter specifies the key used for authentication if the Authentication Rey authentication type is other than No Authentication 7 126 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Address Summarization Figure 7 113 RIP Interface Specific Address Summarization Page RIP Interface Specific Address Summarization Clicking the SUMMARIZATION tab brings up the RIP INTERFACE SPECIFIC ADDRESS SUMMARIZATION page Figure 7 113 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 87 Table 7 87 RIP Interface Specific Address Summarization Page Parameters This parameter specifies the Interface ID for which the RIP aggregate address needs to be configured Subnet Mask This parameter specifies the mask of the aggregate address 7 127 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual RIPng The RIP6 link allows you perform RIPv6 related con
119. SUPERMICRO SuperBlade Network Modules vry M a ae ee oe ee ms did ever SBM GEM X2C 1 10 Gbps SBM GEM 002 Gbps SBM GEM 001 Gbps Ethernet Switch Module Ethernet Pass Through Module Ethernet Switch Module Y ODIN MA nunnat me E See un ir o mad a ame SBM XEM 002 10Gbps Ethernet SBM IBS Q3616 Q3616M Q3618 4x QDR Pass Through Module InfiniBand Switch Module rar jt oo SBM IBS 001 4x DDR SBM GEP TCO 1 Gbps Ethernet InfiniBand Switch Module Pass Through Module for TwinBlade SBM IBP D14 4x DDR InfiniBand Pass Through Module User s Manual Revison 1 0d Superblade Network Modules User s Manual The information in this User s Manual has been carefully reviewed and is believed to be accurate The vendor assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this document makes no commitment to update or to keep current the information in this manual or to notify any person or organization of the updates Please Note For the most up to date version of this manual please see our web site at www supermicro com Super Micro Computer Inc Supermicro reserves the right to make changes to the product described in this manual at any time and without notice This product including software and documentation is the property of Supermicro and or its licensors and is supplied only under a license Any use or reproduction of this product is not allowed except as expressly perm
120. Settings Page Parameters 7 89 VLAN Mapping Page Parameters 7 90 Port Settings Page Parameters iese ese dee ee ee ee ee ge ee 7 91 MSTP CIST Port Status Page Parameters iese es ee esse esse ee 7 92 LA Basic Settings Page Parameters 7 94 Port Channel Interface Basic Settings Page Parameters 7 95 LA Port Channel Settings Page Parameters 7 96 LA Port Settings Page ParameterS sesse esse eke ee ee ee 7 97 802 1x Basic Settings Page Parameters iese ese dese ee ee 7 100 802 1x Port Settings Page Parameters 7 102 802 1x Timer Configuration Page Parameters 7 103 Local Authentication Server Configuration Page Parameters 7 104 MAC Session Info Page Parameters sesse ee ee ee ge ee 7 105 L2 Unicast Filter Configuration Page Parameters esse sesse 7 106 L2 Multicast Filter Configuration Page Parameters 0 7 108 VLAN Interface Basic Settings Page Parameters 7 109 IPv4 Interface Settings Page Parameters 7 110 IP Route Configuration Page Parameters 7 111 LoopBack Basic Settings Page Parameters 7 112 IP6 Route Configuration Page Parameters sesse sesse eke 7 113 IPv6 Interface Settings Page
121. Switch Status Screen r Gigabit Switch List Gigabit Switch 1 Gigabit Switch 2 Gigabit Switch Status r Gigabit Switch Status Gigabit Switch Pwr Status 2 5V 1 25VTomp Error Inldallzed Gigabit Switch 1D On 2 48V 1 20V47C 117F Norma O OK f Gigabit Switch Management IP address 192 168 100 103 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway IP address 192 168 100 1 Date amp Time 04 01 2008 1721 15 f Gigabit Switch Username amp Password Reset In this screen either select WEB MANAGEMENT or type the IP address of the switch usually 192 168 100 102 in the address field of your web browser The SYSTEM MANAGEMENT screen shown in Figure 6 2 appears Figure 6 2 Switch System Management Screen SUPERMICR System Poe Device Name BUB GEM 003 Statistics Firmware Version WSS 1044103 SOK sdk modena 52 1 dev Uparade VLAN Busi Date Tue Jun 5 10 36 07 2007 Trunking MAC address 00 30 48 8c 06 40 Mirror DHCP Cheat Disabled QoS IP Address 122 103 109 102 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Hare Gateway 192 168 100 1 L2 Management L2 Table Aging Disabled Spanning Tree 202 4x Backup setings Restore semings Restore defauts IGMP Snooping Chapter 6 1 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware NOTE You will see BMB GEM 003 on most of these screens This the board model number for the SBM GEM 001 switch and is sometimes used interchangeably with it in describing the product 6 3 Superbla
122. TION page Figure 7 75 which can access the MSTP global configuration The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 54 Table 7 54 Global Configuration Page Parameters System Control Compatibility Transmit Hold Count Maximum Age Seconds Hop Counts Seconds Region Version This parameter Starts or Shutsdown MSTP in the switch This parameter allows you to choose to run the protocol in MSTP RSTP or an STP compatible version This parameter specifies the maximum number of packets that can be sent in a given interval This is configured to avoid flooding This parameter specifies the time period for which the information received in the RSTP BDPU is valid This parameter specifies the maximum number of bridges that a packet can cross before it will be dropped to avoid infinite looping of the packets This parameter specifies the version number of the configuration to be used 7 87 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual MSTP Timers Figure 7 76 Timers Configuration Page Timers Configuration Clicking the TIMERS tab brings up the TIMERS CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 76 which configures the time for MAXIMUM HOP COUNT FORWARD DELAY MAXIMUM AGE TRANSMIT HOLD AGE and HELLO TIME 7 88 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Port Configuration SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM X2C Figure 7 77 CIST Settings Page Refresh Support Help About Log Out 9 1
123. TP root directory on a TFTP server machine Make sure the upgraded TFTP server and switch both have network reach ability Reboot the switch by power cycling the switch power During reboot press any key when it displays the below text as shown in Figure 3 7 Hit any key to stop autoboot 5 Once the boot sequence is interrupted it will display menu options as shown in Figure 3 7 Use the H option to set hardware information by typing the character H This will display the hardware information that can be changed as shown in Figure 3 8 3 12 Chapter 3 Setup and Installation 13 14 Configure the IP address for this switch only for booting purposes using the command ip lt IP address gt For example ip 192 168 2 3 Configure the subnet mask for this switch IP address using the below command mask lt subnet mask gt For example mask 255 255 255 0 Configure the TFTP server IP address using the below command tftpaddr lt TFTP server IP gt For example tftpaddr 192 168 2 100 Configure the gateway address to reach the TFTP server using the below command if the TFTP server is in different network gateway lt gateway IP gt For example gateway 192 168 2 100 Configure the firmware image file name using the below command ramdiskname lt filename gt For example ramdiskname SBM GEM X2C v5 2 10 bin Type Save to save the hardware information Type Exit to exit the hardware information menu Type F to
124. X2C sus e nen rro Home gt System Mgmt gt Layer2 Mgmt Interface VLAN Id Layers Mgmt tvs Ponce Mac Address MP TS Ee Gens ber ertoce VLAN Destination RAD RRDVE Apply Delete Re gt Statistics Prefix Settings ND Cache Configuration Clicking the ND CACHE tab brings up the ND CACHE CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 101 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 76 7 115 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 76 ND Cache Configuration Page Parameters Interface VLAN ID This parameter indicates index of the VLAN interface MAC Address This parameter denotes the physical address of the Destination address This parameter specifies the Age Time Address Settings Figure 7 102 Address Settings Page Address Settings Clicking the ADDRESS SETTINGS tab brings up the ADDRESS SETTINGS page Figure 7 102 which allows you to configure address settings for IPv6 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 77 Table 7 77 Address Settings Page Parameters Interface VLAN ID This parameter specifies the index of the VLAN Interface 7 116 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 77 Address Settings Page Parameters Continued This parameter indicates the length of the prefix in bits associated with this entry s IPv6 address Prefix Length Address Profile ID This parameter indicates the index to the IPv6 a
125. a lower priority queue User configurable mapping priority queue assignment between the eight 802 1p priority classes and the four priority queues is provided If the incoming frame is untagged the switch uses the priority field in the per port default priority configurable in the Port folder to assign a frame to a priority queue If the incoming frame is tagged or priority tagged the switch uses the priority field in the incoming frame to assign the frame to a priority queue The scheduling for transmission among the four priority queues is accomplished by one of the two user configurable schemes strict fixed priority and weighted round robin For strict priority based scheduling the packets which were put in the higher priority queue are transmitted first If there are multiple frames with different priority tags in the same priority queue the frame with higher priority level is transmitted first After all frames in the higher priority queue have been transmitted the frames in the lower priority queue will start transmitting For the weighted round robin based scheduling the number of packets served in the priority queue is determined by the weight number After those packets are transmitted the service moves to transmit the packets in the next queue Therefore a higher priority queue should have a higher weight number than a lower priority queue The weight number is from 1 to 15 for the switch If each queue has same weight number
126. able 5 9 SBM XEM 002 10 Gigabit Pass through Module Interface 5 7 Table 5 10 SBM XEM 002 10 Gigabit Pass through Module Features 5 7 Table 5 11 SBM GEP T20 Gigabit Pass through Module Interface 5 9 Table 5 12 SBM GEP T20 Gigabit Ethernet Pass through Module ESA RE RE dt do ne Rent RE OE 5 9 Table 6 1 SBM GEM 001 Software Features and Functions 6 1 Table 6 2 Port Configuration Screen Controls 6 6 Table 6 3 Port Statistics Screen Controls iese ee ee ke Re ke 6 8 Table 6 4 Port Mirroring Screen Controls iese se ee ee ek ee Re ee 6 15 Table 6 5 QoS Setting Screen Controls 6 17 Table 6 6 Storm Control Screen Controls 6 19 Table 6 7 Comparison of Port States 6 22 Table 6 8 IGMP Snooping Screen Controls 6 30 Table 6 9 Uplink Failure Tracking Configuration Screen Controls 6 32 Table 7 1 Home Page Controls and Components 7 3 Table 7 2 System Information Page Parameters esse ee ek ee ee ee 7 9 Table 7 3 Management Security Basic Settings Page Parameters 7 16 Table 7 4 Radius Server Configuration Page Parameters sesse ese ee 7 17 Table 7 5 TACACS Global Settings Page Parameters iss ees see ese ee 7 18 Table 7 6 TACACS Server Configuration Page Pa
127. ace Statistics Page Parameters Continued Parameter Description Received Unknown This parameter specifies the number of packets received with an unknown Protocols protocol Transmitted Octets This parameter specifies the number of bytes transmitted Transmitted Unicast This parameter specifies the number of unicast packets transmitted Packets Transmitted Nunicast This parameter specifies the number of non unicast packets transmitted Packets Transmitted Discards This parameter specifies the number of packets discarded due to transmit errors Transmitted Errors This parameter specifies the number of transmit errors Ethernet Statistics Figure 7 168 Ethernet Statistics Page Refresh Support Help About Log Out SUPERMICR kie SWITCH SBM GEM X2C sms Home Ethernet Statistics gt System Mgmt Layer2 Mgmt gt Layer Mgmt Gi0 1 Ex0 3 Multicast IGMP Snooping Dynamic Multicast 3 id IGMP PIM DVMRP y Statistics Interface Gol o o 0 OE En o 0 GOETE 1 o Tacacs Go2 o o o 0 o 0 o 0 0 0 9 o 1 0 RMON e pea G03 0 o o 0 0 0 0 o O 1 o wan Go o o 0 o o o 0 0 o 0 0 0 1 o MSTP Gos o o o o o 0 o o o o o o 1 o 802 1 G06 0 o o o o o o o o wW o A 1 o Dos Go7 o o 0 o o o o o CCC 1 o Ring GOS 0 o o o o 0 0 0 0 o o 0 1 0 OSPF 0 dm Goo o o o o o o 0 o 0 o o o 1 o a Goio o o o o 0 0 o 0 0 0 o 0 1 0 IGMP Gon o o o o o o o 0 9 0 o 1 o DVMRP Gon o o o ol o o CIAO 1 o Gon o o o o o o o o 0
128. ackets transmitted This parameter specifies the number of group query packets transmitted This parameter specifies the number of IGMP report packets transmitted This parameter specifies the number of IGMP leave packets transmitted 7 237 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual IGMP Snooping V3 Statistics Figure 7 203 IGMP Snooping V3 Statistics Page IGMP Snooping V3 Statistics Clicking the IGS V3 STATISTICS tab brings up the IGMP SNOOPING V3 STATISTICS page Figure 7 203 which displays IGMP snooping V3 statistics information The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 172 Table 7 172 IGMP Snooping V3 Statistics Page Parameters VLAN ID This parameter specifies the VLAN identifier IS_INCL Messages This parameter specifies the number of messages received with is include Received field TO_INCL Messages This parameter specifies the number of messages received with to include Received field ALLOW Messages Received This parameter specifies the number of allow messages received 7 238 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 172 IGMP Snooping V3 Statistics Page Parameters Continued V3 Reports Sent This parameter specifies the number of V3 reports transmitted IGMP Statistics Figure 7 204 IGMP Route StatisticsPage IGMP Statistics Clicking the IGMP link brings up the IGMP ROUTE STATISTICS page Figure 7 204 which displays IGMP rout
129. address Gateway This parameter specifies the gateway Area ID This parameter specifies the Area ID Interface This parameter specifies the interface 7 232 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware OSPFV3 Link State DB Figure 7 199 OSPFV3 Link State Database Page OSPF v3 Link State Database Clicking the OSPFV3 LINK STATE DATABASE tab brings up the OSPFV3 LINK STATE DATABASE page Figure 7 199 which displays information about OSPF link state database The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 168 Table 7 168 OSPFV3 Link State Database Page Parameters Area ID This parameter specifies the area identifier Link State ID This parameter specifies the link state identifier Sacuence This parameter specifies the sequence number of this link state q information Age This parameter specifies the link state information age in seconds 7 233 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual VRRP Statistics Figure 7 200 VRRP Statistics Page VRRP Statistics Per VRID Clicking the VRRP link brings up the VRRP STATISTICS page Figure 7 200 which displays VRRP global statistics and VRRP router specific statistics The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 169 Table 7 169 VRRP Statistics Page Parameters VRRP Global Statistics Version Errors This parameter specifies the number of version errors VRRP Router Specific Statistics Transitions to Mas
130. anine cards that can be installed in blade modules for use with the InfiniBand or 1 10 Gb switch modules Appendix B LED Descriptions LED descriptions are summarized here in this appendix for quick reference Appendix C Installing Triple Wide Bays This appendix describes and details how to use and set up triple wide bays Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Notes Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Overview The Superblade Network Modules User s Manual contains information on all network modules used for the Supermicro SuperBlade system This incorporates information on the InfiniBand switch module all Ethernet switch modules and all pass through modules for both InfiniBand and Ethernet 1 2 Product Checklist of Typical Components All modules are shipped alone or with a SuperBlade enclosure when ordered Aside from packaging no cables or cords are included 1 3 Features See Chapter 4 InfiniBand Modules on page 4 1 for information and features of the InfiniBand modules See Chapter 5 Ethernet Modules on page 5 1 for information on all Ethernet switches and pass through modules 1 1 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 1 4 Contacting Supermicro Headquarters Address Tel Fax Email Web Site Europe Address Tel Fax Email Asia Pacific Address Tel Fax Web Site Technical Support Email Tel Super Micro Computer Inc 980 Rock Ave San Jo
131. ard has dual ports that can be either 4xDDR IB or 10Gbps Ethernet and uses a Mellanox ConnectX chip This card is no longer in production EOL but users of this card can consider replacement with the AOC IBH XDD Mezzanine HCA card as an alternative Figure A 3 AOC IBH 003 Mezzanine HCA Card DESIGNED IN USA Sy used yr gt Pet 9 on n 01 003 SUPERO REV 1 e Q Q Q lt MET EEND ill Appendix A HCA Mezzanine Cards AOC IBH XDS Mezzanine HCA Card The AOC IBH XDS card has a single 4x DDR 20 Gbps port that can be either 4x DDR IB or 10 Gbps Ethernet and uses a Mellanox ConnectX chip This card comes with a removable extender flange like the one shown in Figure A 6 AOC IBH XQS Mezzanine HCA Card on page A 7 that allows it to be installed in all compatible SuperBlade servers Figure A 4 AOC IBH XDS Mezzanine HCA Card SUPER 4 A0C IBH XD Spit RE i m Superblade Network Modules User s Manual AOC IBH XDD Mezzanine HCA Card The AOC IBH XDD card has dual 4x DDR 20 Gbps ports that can be either 4x DDR IB or 10 Gbps Ethernet and uses a Mellanox ConnectX chip This card comes with a removable extender flange like the one shown in Figure A 6 AOC IBH XQS Mezzanine HCA Card on page A 7 that allows it to be installed in all compatible SuperBlade servers Figure A 5 AOC IBH XDD Mezzanine HCA Card m un o z m O z YSN AOC IBH XQS Mezzanine HCA Card
132. assmap Settings on page 7 48 QOS Policymap Settings on page 7 49 COSQ Scheduling Algorithm on page 7 50 COSQ Weight and Bandwidth Configuration on page 7 51 QOS Basic Settings Figure 7 40 QOS Basic Settings Page QoS Basic Settings Start Clicking the BASIC SETTINGS tab brings up the QOS Bas c SETTINGS page Figure 7 40 which allows you to configure QOS basic settings parameters The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 29 7 47 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 29 QOS Basic Settings Page Parameters System Control With this parameter SYSTEM CONTROL can Start or Shutdown QoS QOS Classmap Settings Figure 7 41 QOS Classmap Settings Page QOS Classmap Settings Clicking the CLASSMAP tab brings up the QOS CLASSMAP SETTINGS page Figure 7 41 which is used to classify the stream of traffic The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 30 Table 7 30 QOS Classmap Settings Page Parameters This parameter specifies a unique ID for the Classmap It must be in the Classmap ID range from 7 to 65535 This parameter specifies the filter type associated with the Classmap It can be set as either MAC filter 1 or IP filter 2 7 48 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware QOS Policymap Settings Figure 7 42 QOS Policymap Settings Page QoS Policymap Settings Clicking the POLICYMAP tab brings up the QOS POLICYMAP SETTINGS page Figur
133. ated CMM See Section 4 4 SBM IBS Q3616M 4X QDR InfiniBand Switch Module on page 4 4 for details NOTE For any blade to access the InfiniBand module it must first have an sy f InfiniBand card installed on its mainboard See Appendix A for details on the r Mezzanine HCA cards that are available for use with the InfiniBand module 4 1 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 4 2 SBM IBS 001 4X DDR InfiniBand Switch Module Figure 4 1 SBM IBS 001 InfiniBand Switch Module Table 4 1 SBM IBS 001 InfiniBand Module Interface mn Module Power LED External InfiniBand Port 10 total Port Activity LED Yellow Table 4 2 SBM IBS 001 InfiniBand Module Features Internal External Ports Internal 14 4X DDR copper ports External 10 4X DDR copper ports Latency 160 ns port to port switch latency Operating System Firmware upgradable 4 2 Chapter 4 InfiniBand Modules 4 3 SBM IBS Q3618 Q3616 4X QDR InfiniBand Switch Module Figure 4 2 SBM IBS Q3618 Q3616 InfiniBand Switch Module 11 12 13 14 15 16 Table 4 3 SBM IBS Q3618 Q3616 InfiniBand Module Interface Item NODO 0d DD Description System error Fault LED Red System status Ready LED Green External InfiniBand Port 16 QSFP ports for Q3636 and 18 QSFP ports for Q3618 Per Port Dual color LED PHY link Green Logic link Amber ACT blinking Green Amber Module Release Handle Port Numbers F
134. back Firmware using TFTP To upgrade fallback firmware using TFTP use the procedure below 1 2 3 4 Copy the latest firmware to the TFTP root directory on the TFTP server machine Make sure the upgraded TFTP server and switch both have network reach ability Login to the Switch CLI either through Telnet or a serial console port Type the below command to upgrade the firmware in the normal area firmware upgrade tftp lt ip address gt lt filename gt flash fallbackl Here lt ip address gt is the IP address of the TFTP server and lt filename gt is the name of the firmware image file On a successful download the CLI displays the below string Firmware download completed successfully After a successful download reboot the switch using the fallback image to verify the fallback image Refer the steps listed above in the procedure Booting using a Fallback Firmware Image above to boot the switch in the fallback image Once both the normal and fallback image both have latest firmware continue to use the normal image as directed in step 8 of the procedure Booting using a Fallback Firmware Image Firmware Failure Recovery Steps In case you have any issues in booting the switch with either a normal or fallback image use the procedure below to recover the switch functionality with a correctly working firmware image Recovering Switch Functionality with a Firmware Image 1 2 de Copy the latest firmware to the TF
135. be changed as shown in Figure 3 8 Figure 3 8 Setting Hardware Information SMC gt H gt HARDWARE INFO Local IP ip 192 168 2 32 Abret Mask mask 255 255 2550 Default Gateway gateway 192 168 2 100 TFTP Server tftpaddr 192 168 2 100 Finmrsre Name ramdiskmame SEM GEM 20C v5 2 10 bin Ramdisk Flag f hg 0 SMC POSC gt rflaz 1 gt HARDWARE INFO Local IP p 192 168 2 32 Abret Mask mask 255 255 2550 Default Gateway gateway 192 168 2 100 TFTP Server tftpaddr 192 168 2 100 Fiomware Name ramdiskmame SEM GEM 20C v5 2 10 bin Ramdisk Flag f hg 1 SMC POSC gt exit Save before Exit Y N y Saving Hardware Info OK gt HARDWARE INFO Local IP ip 192 168 2 32 Amet Mask mack 255 255 2550 Default Gateway gateway 192 168 2 100 TFTP Server tftpaddr 192 168 2 100 Finuvrare Name ramdisloume SBM GEM 32C v5 2 10 bin Ramdiek Flag he 1 To choose the boot from a fallback image type the command rflag 1 Type Save to save the hardware information Type Exit to exit the hardware information menu Type J to boot the image In this case it will boot from a fallback image 3 11 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 8 In case you wish to later move back to a normal image repeat the above the steps with one difference for step 4 where you should use the command rflag 0 instead of rf1ag 1 to boot with a normal firmware image Upgrading Fall
136. c VLAN e ee view and modify dynamica vlan status RSTP view and modify RSTP status MSTP view and modify MSTP status LA view and modify LA status 802 1x Fitters configure L2 unicast and multicast fiters 7 63 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Layer 2 Basic Settings Figure 7 54 MAC Address Table Settings Page MAC Address Table Settings Clicking the LAYER2 BASIC STTINGS link brings up the MAC ADDRESS TABLE SETTINGS page Figure 7 54 which gives you the option to change MAC aging time MAC address confirmation can be done with this time interval 7 64 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Port Manager The PORT MANAGER link has links to the following web pages Port Basic Settings on page 7 65 e Port Monitoring on page 7 67 VLAN Traffic Class on page 7 68 Port Control on page 7 69 e Rate Limiting on page 7 70 NOTE In all port based configuration pages the port number group links are provided on the top In the normal standalone operation of the switch there is only one link and the corresponding port configuration is displayed below it In case of stacking multiple groups of port links are displayed These links provide the configuration of ports from different stack member switches To view the configuration of ports from a particular stack member switch select the corresponding port links For example if three switches having switch iden
137. can choose the FILE option and enter a name for a Startup Configuration file You can also choose the No RESTORE option for not loading any configuration files on the next reboot of the switch 7 13 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Firmware Upgrade Figure 7 10 Firmware Upgrade Page Firmware Upgrade Note Firmware Upload will take a few minutes Please be patient Clicking the FIRMWARE UPGRADE link brings up the FIRMWARE UPGRADE page Figure 7 10 This page allows you to upgrade the firmware in normal or fallback memory In stacking the firmware is upgraded in all stack members automatically 7 14 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Management Security The MANAGEMENT SECURITY link provides configuration for the following features Management Security Basic Settings on page 7 15 Management User Account on page 7 16 Radius on page 7 17 TACACS Global Settings on page 7 18 TACACS Server Configuration on page 7 19 IP Authorized Manager on page 7 20 SSH Configuration on page 7 21 SSLConfiguration on page 7 22 Management Security Basic Settings Figure 7 11 Management Security Basic Settings Page Management Security Basic Settings Clicking the MANAGEMENT SECURITY tab brings up the MANAGEMENT SECURITY BASIC SETTINGS page Figure 7 11 This page allows you to setup the below listed basic security parameters Table 7 3 7 15 Superblade Network Modules
138. ch Firmware Dynamic Multicast Port Configuration Figure 7 153 Dynamic Multicast Port Configuration Page Dynamic Multicast Port Configuration Gi0 1 Ex0 3 Clicking the PORT SETTINGS tab brings up the DYNAMIC MULTICAST PORT CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 153 which configures dynamic multicast at the port level The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 123 Table 7 123 Dynamic Multicast Port Configuration Page Parameters This parameter specifies the Port index Restricted Group This parameter enables or disables RESTRICTED GROUP REGISTRATION on Registration this port 7 173 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual IGMP The IGMP page allows you to configure the IGMP protocol The IGMP protocol in the switch can be configured through the following pages Basic Settings on page 7 174 Interface Configuration on page 7 175 Group Information on page 7 176 Source Information on page 7 177 Basic Settings Figure 7 154 IGMP Configuration Page ource informats IGMP Configuration Disabled Clicking the IGMP CONFIGURATION tab brings up the IGMP CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 154 whose single parameter allows you to enable or disable IGMP in the switch 7 174 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Interface Configuration Figure 7 155 IGMP Interface Configuration Page Clicking the INTERFACE CONFIGURATION tab brings up the IGMP INTERFACE CONFIGU
139. d This parameter specifies the number of unknown PDUs received This parameter specifies the number of invalid PDUs received This parameter specifies the number of LACP PDUs transmitted This parameter specifies the number of Marker PDUs transmitted This parameter specifies the number of Marker response PDUs transmitted 7 212 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware LA Neighbor Statistics Figure 7 185 LA Neighbor Statistics Information Page LA Neighbour Statistics Information Gi0 1 Ex0 3 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 C Joo 0 Clicking the NEIGHBOR STATS tab brings up the LA NEIGHBOR STATISTICS INFORMATION page Figure 7 185 which displays LACP neighbor statistics The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 154 Table 7 154 LA Neighbor Statistics Information Page Parameters Port Index This parameter specifies the port index Oper Key This parameter specifies the Oper Key 7 213 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 802 1X The 802 1x link allows you to view 802 1x statistics through the following pages 802 1X Session Statistics on page 7 214 8
140. d Packets Open PDU IndexAlloc PDU Register PDU Add Agent Caps PDU Notify PDU Ping PDU Remove Agent Caps PDU IndexDeAlloc PDU Description This parameter specifies the number of packets transmitted This parameter specifies the number of open PDUs transmitted This parameter specifies the number of IndexAlloc PDUs transmitted This parameter specifies the number of register PDUs transmitted This parameter specifies the number of add agent caps PDUs transmitted This parameter specifies the number of notify PDUs transmitted This parameter specifies the number of ping PDUs transmitted This parameter specifies the number of remove agent caps PDUs transmitted This parameter specifies the number of IndexDeAlloc PDUs transmitted 7 197 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 141 Agentx Subagent Statistics Page Parameters Continued UnRegister PDU Response PDU Received Packets Get Next PDU TestSet PDU Cleanup PDU Dropped Packets Open Fail Errors Response PDU This parameter specifies the number of unregister PDUs transmitted This parameter specifies the number of response PDUs transmitted This parameter specifies the number of packets received This parameter specifies the number of get next PDUs received This parameter specifies the number of test set PDUs received This parameter specifies the number of cleanup PDUs received This parameter specifies the
141. d on card is required if redundant switches are installed Either the RJ45 connector or the KVM connector on the front of the SBM IBS Q3616M can be used to connect to the integrated CMM module see Figure 4 3 There is also an activity indicator LED for the CMM on the left hand side of the front of the SBM IBS Q3616M The reset button lower left pushed once will reset the SBM IBS Q3616M If held down for approximately 5 seconds it will send a signal to the CMM which cause the CMM to return to default settings See Chapter 4 Section 4 1 of the SuperBlade User s Manual for more information on the operation of the CMM itself including instructions on how to use both the KVM and RJ45 connections 4 5 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 4 5 SBM IBP D14 InfiniBand Pass Through Module Figure 4 4 SBM IBP D14 InfiniBand Pass Through Triple Wide Module The SBM IBP D14 InfniBand Pass through Module is a triple wide non configurable pass through module that includes fourteen 14 4X DDR copper ports with CX 4 connectors The pass through module is used to provide a connection between the Infiniband controller Add on Card mounted on the blade s mainboard and an external InfiniBand device Unlike the SBM IBS 001 4x DDR InfiniBand switch module this is a pass through module With this module Blade 1 would be connected directly to port 1 Blade 2 to port 2 and so on If you are only connected to 10 blades then ports
142. d printed circuit boards PCBs in their antistatic bags until ready for use Touch a grounded metal object before removing the board from the antistatic bag Do not let components or PCBs come into contact with your clothing which may retain a charge even if you are wearing a wrist strap Handle a board by its edges only do not touch its components peripheral chips memory modules or contacts When handling chips or modules avoid touching their pins Put the mainboard and peripherals back into their antistatic bags when not in use For grounding purposes make sure the blade enclosure provides excellent conductivity between the power supplies the blade modules and the mainboard 2 4 Operating Precautions Care must be taken to assure that the cover of the blade unit is in place when the blade is operating to assure proper cooling Out of warranty damage to the blade can occur if this practice is not strictly followed Any drive carrier without a hard drive installed must remain fully installed in the drive bay when the blade module is operating to ensure proper airflow 2 2 Chapter 3 Setup and Installation This chapter covers the setup and installation of the SuperBladeSuperBlade Ethernet switch modules SuperMicro has two different Gigabit Ethernet switch modules for its SuperBlade system The first is the SBM GEM 001 Gigabit Ethernet switch module with ten external 1 Gbps Ethernet uplinks The second SBM
143. ddress Profile table Address Profile Figure 7 103 Address Profile Settings Page Address Profile Address Profile Settings Clicking the ADDRESS PROFILE tab brings up the ADDRESS PROFILE SETTINGS page Figure 7 103 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 78 Table 7 78 Address Profile Settings Page Parameters Profile ID This parameter specifies the index of the Address Profile entry On Link Adv Status This parameter indicates the On Link Advertise Flag status 7 117 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 78 Address Profile Settings Page Parameters Continued Parameter Preferred Time Valid Time Valid Flag Preferred Flag Description This parameter specifies the Preferred Lifetime of the prefix address that uses this profile This parameter indicates the Valid Lifetime of the prefix address that uses this profile This parameter specifies if the Valid Lifetime Flag is Variable or Fixed This parameter specifies if the Preferred Lifetime Flag is Variable or Fixed Prefix Settings SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM X2C sms o EE NEE Home gt System Mgmt gt Layer2 Mgmt y Layer3 Mgmt 1 gt Statistics Figure 7 104 Prefix Configuration Page Prefix Configuration Interface VLAN ID Prefix Prefix Length Prefix Profile ld Add Reset Interface VLAN 1D Prefix Prefix Length Delete Clicking the PREFIX SETTI
144. de Network Modules User s Manual 6 1 Port Status The PORT STATUS screen provides a status overview of the switch s 24 ports As shown in Figure 6 3 it includes link speed duplex flow control jumbo frame and PVID In this screen click on Port on the left menu bar The port status will show up To retrieve and update to the latest status click the REFRESH button Figure 6 3 Port Status Screen GAVWBAWNDVBVPVVVHGVSVBIBIVIVBVWIVIWs WII UPERMICRO uasaasaaaaaaaaasaaaaaaaaa IEA 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 PORT Status Help System x Link Speed Flow Jumbo Link Speed Flow Jumbo Port Status Duplex Control Frame PID Port Status Duplex Control Frame pvo Statistics 1000Mbps 01 Down 1 13 Up Disabled Disabled 1 VLAN Full EDE 02 Down 1 44 Down 1 SRE 03 Down 1 15 Down 1 Mirror 04 Down 1 16 Down 1 pS 05 Up O00MbPS Disabled Disabled 1 47 Down 2 hea Rate pe L2 Management 96 Down 1 48 Down R 07 Down 1 19 Down 1 Spanning Tree 08 Down 1 20 Down 1 802 1x 09 Down 1 24 Down 1 IGMP Snooping 10 Down 1 22 Down 1 Cable Diagnostic 11 Up TOONS Disabled Disabled 1 23 Down 1 UpLink Failure 12 Down _ 1 24 Down 1 Track Password The P
145. download the firmware image In this case it will download to the normal image area On a successful download the switch displays the below string Updating the ramdisk image This may take awhile OK After a successful download boot the switch to use this latest firmware by typing J If the download fails check the IP address file name network connections and configurations to reach the TFTP server 3 13 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Notes 3 14 Chapter 4 InfiniBand Modules 4 1 Overview InfiniBand is a switch based point to point bidirectional serial link network communications architecture Supermicro offers three different Infiniband modules 4X DDR 20 Gb s switch with 14 internal ports and 10 external CX4 ports 4X DDR 20 Gb s pass through with 14 internal ports and 14 external CX4 ports 4X QDR 40 Gb s switch with 20 internal ports and up to 18 external QSFP ports 3 models The main function of the SuperBlade InifiniBand switch modules is to provide high speed interconnectivity among the blade modules and with external peripherals These are hot pluggable modules that must be installed in a double wide or triple wide bay at the lower right of the enclosure Because they occupy one of the bays alternatively used for the CMM only one InfiniBand module may normally be installed in the system However the SBM IBS Q3616M is an exception to this since it includes an integr
146. dy On passed the POST Power On Self Test with no critical faults Only Module Fault LED When lit this LED indicates that the GEM 001 GbE switch Red dos module has either failed the POST or has detected an GEM 001 Module y operational fault within the module When this LED is lit the Only fault LED on the blade enclosure will also turn on Solid Green This indicates that the link is established no activity Link Activity Ethernet This indicates that data is being transmitted Tx or received Blinking Green Port Status LED Rx Off This indicates that no link is established Speed Ethernet Port Amber Connection speed of the port is 1 Gb sec Status LED A j GEM 001 Module Green Connection speed of the port is 100 Mb sec Only Off Connection speed of the port is 10 Mb sec B 1 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual B 2 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet Module LED Descriptions The SBM GEM X2C 1 10 Gbps Ethernet module and XEM 002 10GbE Pass through Module LEDs are described below in Table B Table B 2 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet Switch LED Indicators Green Solid denotes link established no activity Blinking denotes activity Off indicates that no link is established RJ45 Link Activity GEM X2C Module Only Initiation OK LED Bue Denotes successful initiation OK status when solidly lit Green Denotes activity for 10Gbps port when solidly lit Blinking green denotes data transmited Tx or received
147. e 7 136 OSPF Area Aggregation Page 7 137 OSPF As External Aggregation Configuration Page 7 138 OSPF v3 Basic Settings Page 7 140 Interface Settings Page i esse see ee Re ee ee Re ee RA ee 7 141 OSPFv3 Area Settings Page sesse ese see ee ee ee ee ge ee 7 143 OSPF AS External Aggregation Configuration Page 7 144 BGP Basic Settings Page 7 146 BGP Peer Configuration Page 7 147 BGP MED Configuration Page ees esse dese ee ee ee ee ee ee 7 148 BGP Local Preference Configuration Page iese see ee 7 149 BGP Filter Configuration Page ees ese ee ee ee Re ee 7 151 BGP Route Aggregation Configuration Page oo cccnocccm 7 152 Advanced BGP Configuration Page sesse ee ee ee 7 153 BGP Community Management Page 7 154 RRD Basic Settings Page 7 156 RRD BGP Configuration Page 7 157 RRD RIP Configuration Page cccccesseseeseeeeeeeeteeeeeeaees 7 158 RRD OSPF Configuration Page 7 159 RRD6 Basic Settings Page 7 160 RRD6 Filter Configuration Page iese see see ee ke ee Re 7 161 RRD6 OSPFv3 Configuration Page 7 162 RRD RIPv6 Configuration Page 7 163 VRRP Basic Settings Page 7 164 VRRP Settings Page EE RR EES aria 7 165 Multicast Home Page ee ee ee ee ee Re ee ee ee ee 7 166 IGMP Snooping Configuration Page 7 167 IGMP Snooping Timer Configuration
148. e The firmware for the SBM GEM X2C 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet switch module resides on a chip on the PCB The switch has internal flash memory in two areas to hold two firmware images The flash area used for the normal firmware image is referred to as the normal area The other flash area referred to as the fallback area is used to store the firmware image for fallback purpose in case of a failure to boot from the normal area Firmware Upgrading Procedures The procedures for firmware upgrading and using a fallback firmware image are listed below Upgrading Firmware on the Switch using TFTP To upgrade the switch s firmware use the procedure below 1 Copy the latest firmware to the TFTP root directory on the TFTP server machine 2 Make sure the upgraded TFTP server and switch both have network reach ability 3 Login to the Switch CLI either through Telnet or a serial console port 4 Type the below command to upgrade the firmware in the normal area firmware upgrade tftp lt ip address gt lt filename gt flash normal Here lt ip address gt is the IP address of the TFTP server and lt filename gt is the name of the firmware image file 5 On successful download CLI displays the below string Firmware download completed successfully After a successful download reboot the switch to use this latest firmware 7 Ifthe download fails check the IP address file name network connections and configurations to reach the TFTP
149. e IP Address 192 168 1 112 Description 192 168 1 112 Login ID E th ministator Password 00000 Save ID and Password E PT IPMI Domain 1 1 Authentication Blade System Text Console KYM Console Event Log Logon Management Virtual Media CMM Setting Get Virtual Media information done 3 5 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual a Type in your Username in the USERNAME box b Type in your Password in the PASSWORD box and click on LOGIN 7 NOTE The default username and the default password are both ADMIN The Default IP address is 192 168 100 102 r The IPMI Blade System screen shown in Figure 3 5 is then displayed Figure 3 5 IPMI Blade System Screen 6 d0 File Edit Session Menage Help E aardse 18 SuperBlade SUPERMICR Ses IPMI Domain Aw Q ft Failure 0 ae Blade 10 10 View Option Power 4 4 7 Status Switch 1 2 7 Picture CMM 2 2 Y Number IB 0 2 O Legend Help A Failure Summary H iam Failure Table No Level Source Ttem Detail Side Groups E amp amp Failure Location Front Rear Authentication Blade System Text Console KYM Console Event Log Logon Management Virtual Media CMM Setting Login to SuperBlade 192 168 1 112 successfully 3 Clicking on a gigabit switch module will display the gigabit switch in the Gigabit Switch panel on t
150. e 7 42 which is used to specify action for a specified classmap The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 31 Table 7 31 QOS Policymap Settings Page Parameters This parameter specifies the unique ID for Policymap The value ranges Policy Map ID between 1 and 65535 Traffic Rate This parameter specifies the TRAFFIC RATE of data that has to be applied bean A This parameter specifies the action to be applied on out of profile data and OutErofleAction can be specified as either Policy DSCP or Drop The OUT PROFILE ACTION VALUE can be specified as Drop or from 0 to 63 Out Profile Action Value for DSCP 7 49 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual COSQ Scheduling Algorithm Figure 7 43 COSQ Scheduling Algorithm Settings Page Refresh Support Help About Log Out SUPE af S f ST RU U EEES 00 EEE oc Home BEE COSQ Scheduling Algorithm ee ese Securty a Select Port Number CEE AGENT AGENT E zi Layer2 Mgmt e ases Eangasanaguaceaveas Clicking the COSQ ALGORITHM tab brings up the COSQ SCHEDULING ALGORITHM SETTINGS page Figure 7 43 which allows you to choose the COSQ Class of Service Queue scheduling algorithm for every port The parameters for this page are shown in able A Table 7 32 COSQ Scheduling Algorithm Settings Page Parameters Port Number als o ports allows you to select from the port index for your selected 7 50 C
151. e Mac ACL CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 21 which displays the various parameters to configure the MAC Access List The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 11 Table 7 11 MAC ACL Configuration Page Parameters ACL Number This parameter specifies a unique ID for the access list 7 26 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 11 MAC ACL Configuration Page Parameters Continued Action This parameter specifies the action to be taken for the access list This parameter specifies the VLAN ID for which the access list has to be VEAN ID applied This parameter specifies the Encapsulation type of the packet for which the access list has to be applied Encapsulation IP Standard ACL Figure 7 22 IP Standard ACL Configuration Page IP Standard ACL Configuration Clicking the IP STANDARD ACL tab brings up the IP STANDARD ACL CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 22 which displays the various ACL Access Control List parameters to configure the Standard IP access lists The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 12 7 27 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 12 IP Standard ACL Configuration Page Parameters Parameter ACL Number Action Source and Destination IP Address Subnet Mask Ports List Incoming Ports List Outgoing Description This parameter specifies the unique ID for the access list This value must be in the range from 1 to
152. e bay 3 Replace immediately with another module or with a dummy module cover to maintain airflow integrity 4 7 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual InfiniBand Switch LEDs InfiniBand switch LEDs are listed and described in Table B 4 in Appendix B Blade Software for Access to InfiniBand Switch Module The InfiniBand Switch Module is an unmanaged switch and requires no configuration Blades which are to be connected to it will require an appropriate driver software package to be installed The Windows software package WinOF can be downloaded from http Awww mellanox com content pages php pg products dyn product family 32 amp menu_section 34 The Windows ReadMe is available at http www mellanox com related docs prod_software Mellanox WinOF VPI Readme pdf Linux OFED software package is available from the following link http www mellanox com content pages php pg products dyn product family 268menu_section 34 Linux release notes http www mellanox com related docs prod_software MLNX OFED 1 5 1 release notes txt 4 8 Chapter 5 Ethernet Modules Your SuperBlade enclosure can include either of two models of Ethernet switch modules or two models of Ethernet pass through modules installed in it The Ethernet switch modules and the SBM GEM 002 Gigabit pass through module can only be installed in the upper and or lower left module bays whereas the SBM XEM 002 10 Gigabit
153. e information The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 173 Table 7 173 IGMP Route Statistics Page Parameters Interface This parameter specifies the interface identifier Group Queries Received This parameter specifies the number of group query packets received IGMP V1 V2 Reports This parameter specifies the number of IGMP V1 V2 report packets Received received 7 239 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 173 IGMP Route Statistics Page Parameters Continued Parameter IGMP V3 Reports Received General Queries Transmitted Group Queries Transmitted Group and Source Queries Transmitted Description This parameter specifies the number of IGMP V3 report packets received This parameter specifies the number of general query packets transmitted This parameter specifies the number of group query packets transmitted This parameter specifies the number of group and source query packets transmitted 7 240 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware PIM The PIM link allows you to view PIM statistics through the following pages PIM Interface Statistics on page 7 241 PIM Neighbor Statistics on page 7 242 PIM BSR Info on page 7 243 PIM RP Set Information on page 7 244 PIM Route Information on page 7 245 PIM Interface Statistics Figure 7 205 PIM Interface Statistics Page PIM Interface Statistics Clicking the INTERFAC
154. e number of fragments received This parameter specifies the number of jabbers This parameter specifies the number of collisions 7 194 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 139 RMON Ethernet Statistics Page Parameters Continued 64 Octets This parameter specifies the number of Ethernet packets received with a size less than 64 bytes o This parameter specifies the number of Ethernet packets received with a les andas size between 128 and 255 bytes This parameter specifies the number of Ethernet packets received with a 512 1023 Octets size between 512 and 1023 bytes 7 195 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual SNMP Statistics The SNMP Statistics link allows you to configure SNMP Statistics through the following pages Agent on page 7 196 SNMP AgentX on page 7 197 Agent Figure 7 172 SNMP Statistics Page SNMP Statistics Clicking the SNMP AGENT link brings up the SNMP STATISTICS page Figure 7 172 which displays SNMP statistics The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 140 Table 7 140 SNMP Statistics Page Parameters SNMP Packets Input This parameter specifies the number of SNMP packets input SNMP Unknown This parameter specifies the number of SNMP unknown community Community Name names SNMP Get Next PDU s This parameter specifies the number of SNMP Get Next PDU s 7 196 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware
155. e the DYNAMIC PATH COST Calculation CALCULATION 7 82 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware RSTP Basic Settings Figure 7 72 RSTP Configuration Page RSTP Configuration Clicking the BASIC SETTINGS tab brings up the RSTP CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 72 which displays the various parameters for RSTP configuration The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 51 Table 7 51 RSTP Configuration Page Parameters System Control This parameter allows you to start or shutsdown RSTP in the switch This parameter allows you to choose to run the protocol as an RSTP or Compatibility STP compatible version This parameter specifies the maximum number of packets that can be sent MARIE Holg Count in a given interval This is configured to avoid flooding 7 83 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Port Settings Figure 7 73 Port Status Configuration Page SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM X2C sus RECENT NT Port Status Configuration Home System Mgmt ystem Settings Stack Layer2 Mgmt Layer2 Basic Settings Port Manager VLAN Dynamic VLAN RST MSTP La 802 1 Fiters Layer3 Mgmt gt Multicast Statistics Clear All JEL SelectAll Clicking the PORT SETTINGS tab brings up the PORT STATUS CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 73 which allows you to set the configuration per port related to RSTP The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 52 Table
156. e this feature Client to Client Reflection by disabling client to client reflection If disabled then the Route Reflector will not advertise routes learnt from a client peer to other client peers This occurs when all peers within a cluster are fully meshed and the client peer itself is able to advertise routes to other clients of the route reflector If the penalty associated with a suppressed route falls below this value the route is re used Dampening Reuse Value 7 153 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 108 Advanced BGP Configuration Page Parameters Continued Parameter Dampening Max Suppress Time Dampening Decay Granularity Dampening Reuse Granularity Dampening Reuse Array Size Confederation Identifier Best Path MED Confed Confederation Peers Description This parameter specifies the maximum time in seconds a route can be suppressed This parameter specifies the time granularity in seconds used to perform all decay computations This parameter specifies the time interval between evaluations of the reuse lists Each reuse lists corresponds to an additional time increment This parameter specifies the size of the reuse index arrays This size determines the accuracy with which suppressed routes can be placed within the set of reuse lists when suppressed for a long time This parameter specifies the BGP confederation identifier The possible values are
157. e utility A list of controls for this page is shown in Table 7 1 The basic page structure of the HOME page is duplicated for all subsequent sub pages of the Supermicro Switch web based interface utility Figure 7 2 Home Page fm Supermicro Switch Layer Mgmt Layer3 Mgmt System Settings dy Laver Basic Settings P IOMP Sneoging e Elle Management Post Manager Iss Dynamic multicast ad Emse Lpgrade MAN Dieser Y s mr Management Secunty DHCP Relay EM lle o page Su dv Sales QoS Dunamis SLAN LA Be BGR ACL NIE ES Lu BiEng BRD Web Settings Staching MSIE Bieu OSPE REDS se OPE VERE EMON System Statistics Layer Statistics Layer Statistics Multicast Statistics Interface MAN tid R TE EI Badius RSIR email ary ede MP ehil TACACS Server MSI BP A PS EN nati ll Tiel Bhs Bel Die vedo SNMP AGENT La OSPFV3 SNMP AGENTX mu VERE The Supermicro Switch software is implemented using Open sources from OpenSSL OpenSSH and other open source community View System Acknowledgement for detailed description Copyright 2008 Super Micro Computer Inc This page is best viewed with 10241768 resolution Table 7 1 Home Page Controls and Components The Top Page Links are present both on the Home page and all other Top Page Links pages accessed and contain links to support pages or additional controls for all pages viewed with the Web Management Utility See Top Page Links b
158. ected The switch supports IEEE802 1d Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol significantly reduces the convergence time by assigning port roles and by determining the active topology A reconfiguration of the spanning tree can occur in less than one second The RSTP is backward compatible with legacy devices running IEEE802 1d STP and serves as an STP device when an STP device is present in the network Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU The spanning tree is built by obtaining switch information by exchanging Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU packets among the participating switches When RSTP is enabled for a switch it will generate a BPDU and periodically forward it out through each port on the switch The interval is configurable through the Hello Time which is set to a two second default This enables the switch to keep track of network topology changes and enable or disable ports as required The BPDU contains the information about the transmitting switch and its ports including MAC address bridge priority port priority and port path cost The BPDU packet is sent out by using the unique MAC address of the port itself as a source address and the destination address of the STP multicast address 01 80 C2 00 00 00 There are three types of BPDUs e Configuration BPDU for spanning tree computation Topology Change Notification TCN BPDU announces changes in netwo
159. ee ee Re 7 185 Statistics Home Page ou esse see seke ee ke eke ee Re ee ee ke 7 186 Interface Statistics Page 7 187 Ethernet Statistics Page esse sesse ee ke ee ee ke ee ke 7 188 Radius Server Statistics Page iese ee ee Re ee ee ee 7 190 TACACS Statistics Page ese see ee Re Re ke Re Re ee 7 192 RMON Ethernet Statistics Page esse ese ee ek ee ee ee 7 194 SNMP Statistics Page 7 196 VLAN Current Database Page 7 199 VLAN Port Statistics Page 7 200 VLAN Multicast Table Page 7 201 VLAN Counter Statistics Page 7 202 VLAN Capabilities Page iese esse ee ek ee ee ee ge ee ee 7 203 VLAN FDB Entries Page 7 204 RSTP Information Page 7 205 RSTP Port Statistics Page 7 206 MSTP Information Page ecccceceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeetaes 7 208 MSTP CIST Port Statistics Page 7 209 MSTP MSTI Port Statistics Page 7 210 LA Port Statistics Page 7 212 LA Neighbor Statistics Information Page 7 213 802 1x Session Statistics Page ee ee ee ee Re ee 7 214 802 1x Supplicant Session Statistics Page 7 215 MAC Session Statistics Page 7 216 ARP Cache Page AA NR ER ED 7 218 ICMP Statistics Page 7 219 IPV6 Interface Statistics Page esse ese ee ke ee ee ee 7 221 ICMPV6 Statistics Page esse ese see ee ke ee ee ke ee ee ee 7 223 RIP Interface Statistics Page 7 225 RIP6 Interface Statistics Page 7 226 RIP6 Route Information Page 7 227 OSPF Route Information Page 7
160. elete Extended Community table This parameter enables or disables advertisement of the Extended Community attributes to the peer RRD The RRD link allows you to manage the Route Redistribution with the help of the following pages e RRD Basic Settings on page 7 156 BGP on page 7 157 RIP on page 7 158 e OSPF on page 7 159 7 155 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual RRD Basic Settings Figure 7 136 RRD Basic Settings Page RRD Basic Settings Clicking the BASIC SETTINGS tab brings up the RRD BAsic SETTINGS page Figure 7 136 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 110 Table 7 110 RRD Basic Settings Page Parameters RRD Status eh this parameter Route Re distribution can be enabled in the Router ID This parameter represents the Router ID of the switch 7 156 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware BGP Figure 7 137 RRD BGP Configuration Page RRD BGP Configuration Note BGP Module should be enabled to enable route redistribution funtionality in BGP Clicking the BGP tab brings up the RRD BGP CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 137 which allows you to re distribute the routes that are learnt through other routing protocols to BGP The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 111 Table 7 111 RRD BGP Configuration Page Parameters BGP Status This parameter enables or disables redistribution for BGP Import With this parameter you ca
161. elow for further details Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 1 Home Page Controls and Components The Left Side Tree contains an expandable list of links for you to use Left Side Tree to get to other management pages All configuration pages contain this navigation tree The HOME page is displayed on successful validation of the user name and password The information in this page presents a brief overview of the switch web based management utility See Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 and Figure 7 5 for different views of the Home page for each of Supermico s 10 Gbps switches Figure 7 3 SBM GEM X2C Home Page Supermicro Switch oe Wel dudo The Supermicro Switch software is implemented using Open sources from OpenSSL OpenSSH and other open source community View System Acknowledgement for detailed description Copyright 2008 Super Micro Computer inc This page ts best viewed with 10241768 resolution Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Figure 7 4 SSE G24 TG4 Home Page Supermicro Switch The Supermicro Switch software is implemented using Open sources from OpenSSL OpenSSH and other open source community View System Acknowledgement for detailed description Copyright 2008 Super Micro Computer Inc This page is best viewed with 1024768 resolution Figure 7 5 SSE G48 TG4 Home Page Supermicro Switch The
162. emory modules and processors When working around exposed electrical circuits another person who is familiar with the power off controls should be nearby to switch off the power if necessary Use only one hand when working with powered on electrical equipment This is to avoid making a complete circuit which will cause electrical shock Use extreme caution when using metal tools which can easily damage any electrical components or circuit boards they come into contact with Do not use mats designed to decrease electrostatic discharge as protection from electrical shock Instead use rubber mats that have been specifically designed as electrical insulators The power supply power cords must include a grounding plug and must be plugged into grounded electrical outlets Power input requires 110 240 VAC depending upon your power supply module Mainboard Battery This battery must be replaced only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer CR2032 Lithium 3V battery Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions WARNING There is a danger of explosion if the onboard battery is installed A upside down which will reverse its polarities Mainboard replaceable soldered in fuses Self resetting PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient fuses on the mainboard must be replaced by trained service technicians only The new fuse must be the same or equivalent as the one replaced Contact technical support fo
163. en 6 13 Figure 6 11 Trunking Screen eie ee ee Re ee Re ee Re ER de ee ke 6 14 Figure 6 12 Port Mirroring Screen 6 15 Figure 6 13 QoS Setting Screen 6 17 Figure 6 14 Rate Limit and Storm Control Screen 6 18 Figure 6 15 Storm Control Screen 6 19 Figure 6 16 L2 Management Screen 6 20 Figure 6 17 L2 Management Current Entries Screen 6 20 Figure 6 18 Rapid Spanning Tree Screen ee ke ee Re ER Re ee 6 23 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Figure 6 19 Rapid Spanning Tree Port Settings 6 25 Figure 6 20 802 1x Configuration Screen 6 27 Figure 6 21 IGMP Snooping Screen 6 29 Figure 6 22 Uplink Failure Tracking Configuration Screen 6 32 Figure 7 1 Beleid GER RE OR OR AR OE 7 2 Figure 7 2 Home Page ies EER GEE ida 7 3 Figure 7 3 SBM GEM X2C Home Page iese esse ese ese ese ee ee ee ee ee ee eg ee 7 4 Figure 7 4 SSE G24 TG4 Home Page eie ese sees testes ee ese ee ee ee ee ee ee 7 5 Figure 7 5 SSE G48 TG4 Home Page ees ese sees see ese ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 7 5 Figure 7 6 System Management Page iese ee ee ee Re ee ee ee ee ee 7 7 Figure 7 7 System Settings Page ee ee ke ee ee Re ee Re nana ee Re ee 7 9 Figure 7 8 System Version Page see ee ke ee ee ke Re ed ee ek ee 7 11 Figure 7 9 File Management Page ee ee ee ee ke ee 7 12 Figure 7 10 Firmware Upgrade Page ee ee ee ee ke ee 7 14 Figure 7 11 Management Security Basic Settings Page
164. ence in which case you will be required to correct the interference at your own expense California Best Management Practices Regulations for Perchlorate Materials This Perchlorate warning applies only to products containing CR Manganese Dioxide Lithium coin cells Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate for further details WARNING HANDLING OF LEAD SOLDER MATERIALS USED IN THIS A PRODUCT MAY EXPOSE YOU TO LEAD A CHEMICAL KNOWN TO THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA TO CAUSE BIRTH DEFECTS AND OTHER REPRODUCTIVE HARM Manual Revison 1 0d Release Date September 23 2010 Unless you request and receive written permission from Super Micro Computer Inc you may not copy any part of this document Information in this document is subject to change without notice Other products and companies referred to herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or mark holders Copyright 2010 by Super Micro Computer Inc All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America Table of Contents Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 O sise 1 1 1 2 Product Checklist of Typical Components 1 1 1 3 FeatureS se nacre Gla O 1 1 1 4 Contacting SUDeFMICFO ee ee se ee ek ee Ge GR Re Ge GR RR Ge Ge RR Ge Re 1 2 Chapter 2 System Safety 2 1 2 1 Electrical Safety Precautions 2 1 2 2 General Safety Precautions
165. er of authentication fails received This parameter specifies the number of authentication get users received This parameter specifies the number of authentication get passes received 7 192 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 138 TACACS Statistics Page Parameters Continued Authentication Get Data Received Authentication Follows Received Authentication Session Timeouts Authorization Pass Add Received Authorization Fails Received Authorization Follows Received Accounting Start Requests Accounting Stop Requests Accounting Errors Received Accounting Session Timeouts Socket Failures This parameter specifies the number of authentication get datas received This parameter specifies the number of authentication follows received This parameter specifies the number of authentication session timeouts received This parameter specifies the number of authentication pass adds received This parameter specifies the number of authentication fails received This parameter specifies the number of authentication follows received This parameter specifies the number of accounting start requests This parameter specifies the number of accounting stop requests This parameter specifies the number of accounting errors received This parameter specifies the number of accounting sessions received This parameter specifies the number of socket failures 7 193
166. ers required to configure the Extended IP access lists The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 13 7 28 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 13 IP Extended ACL Configuration Page Parameters ACL Number This parameter specifies the unique ID for the access list This value must be in the range from 1001 to 65535 Source and Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP Address for which the access list must be Address applied This parameter specifies the Incoming Port List for which the filter has to Ports List Incoming be applied Protocol This parameter specifies the type of protocol This parameter specifies the Message Type to be checked for ICMP Message Type Packets TOS This parameter specifies the Type of Service for the access list RST Bit This parameter indicates the TCP Reset Bit to be checked against the incoming packet Source Port Max These parameters specify the destination ports to which the access list must be applied Destination Port Max 7 29 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual WEBGUI Settings Figure 7 24 Web GUI Settings Page Web GUI Settings Clicking the WEB SETTINGS link brings up the WEB GUI SETTINGS page Figure 7 24 which displays all basic Web GUI settings The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 14 Table 7 14 Web GUI Settings Page Parameters This timeout value is used to automatically log
167. es an OID mask Use this parameter to specify whether the STORAGE TYPE is volatile or Storage Type non volatile SNMP Target Address Settings Figure 7 30 SNMP Target Address Settings Page SNMP Target Address Settings Clicking the TARGET ADDRESS tab brings up the SNMP TARGET ADDRESS SETTINGS page Figure 7 30 which configures SNMP target address parameters The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 20 Table 7 20 SNMP Target Address Settings Page Parameters Target Name This parameter specifies a TARGET NAME as a unique identifier 7 36 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 20 SNMP Target Address Settings Page Parameters Continued TARGET TIMEOUT specifies the maximum round trip for communicating with Target Timeout the TARGET IP ADDRESS The TRANSPORT TAG value is used to select a target address for a particular Transport Tag operation 9 P Use this parameter to specify whether the STORAGE TYPE is volatile or Storage Type non volatile SNMP Target Parameter Settings Figure 7 31 SNMP Target Parameter Settings Page Targ SNMP Target Parameter Settings Clicking the TARGET PARAMETER tab brings up the SNMP TARGET PARAMETER SETTINGS page Figure 7 31 which configures SNMP Target Address parameters The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 21 7 37 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 21 SNMP Target Parameter S
168. es the interface index of the port on which MSTP is Port being run Port State This parameter specifies the current state of the port This parameter specifies the cost associated with this port which will be cor added to the cost of any path that includes this port 7 91 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual CIST Port Status Figure 7 80 MSTP CIST Port Status Page Help About Log Out SUPERMICR Bis eres SWITCH SBM GEM X2C sus M ET RTE RE NE N MSTP CIST Port Status Home prie Gi0 1 Ex0 3 File Management Firmware Upgrade ere Security Designated Designeted EE EG Type Role Port State web Settings Loree AE Gi0 1 80 00 003048 23 00 03 32768 80 00 003048230003 80 01 0 80 00 003048230003 32768 0 SharedLan Disabled Discarding Ale Gi0 2 0 00 0030 48 a3 00 03 32768 80 00 00 3048230003 80 02 0 0 00 0030 48 3 00 03 32768 0 SharedLan Disabled Discarding ga Gi03 0 00 00 30 48 23 00 03 32768 80 00 00 3048 a3 0003 80 03 0 8000003048230003 32768 0 SharedLan Disabled Discarding Stack Gi0 4 0 00 0030 48 23 00 03 32768 80 00 00 30 48 2300 03 80 04 0 80 00 0030 48 3 00 03 32768 O SharedLan Disabled Discarding pd GIS 80 00 0030 48 23 00 03 32768 80 00 0030 48 23 00 03 80 05 O 8000003048230003 32768 0 SharedLan Disabled Discarding ee Gi0 6 0 00 00 30 48 23 00 03 32768 80 00 00 30 48 23 0003 80 06 0 80 00 00 30 48 23 00 03 32768 0 SharedLan Disabled Discarding oie ve Gi0 7 0 00 0030 48 23 0003 32
169. esse 7 230 Table 7 167 OSPFV3 Route Information Page Parameters esse 7 232 Table 7 168 OSPFV3 Link State Database Page Parameters iese 7 233 Table 7 169 VRRP Statistics Page Parameters 7 234 Table 7 170 IGMP Snooping Clear Statistics Page Parameters 7 236 Table 7 171 IGMP Snooping V1 V2 Statistics Page Parameters 7 237 Table 7 172 IGMP Snooping V3 Statistics Page Parameters 0 0 7 238 Table 7 173 IGMP Route Statistics Page Parameters 7 239 Table 7 174 PIM Interface Statistics Page Parameters sesse see eke 7 241 Table 7 175 PIM Neighbor Statistics Page Parameters esse sesse ese ee 7 242 Table 7 176 PIM BSR Info Page Parameters iese ese see ee ee ee ee ee 7 243 Table 7 177 PIM RP Information Page Parameters 7 244 Table 7 178 PIM Route Information Page Parameters esec 7 245 Table 7 179 DVMRP Routes Page Parameters 7 246 Table 7 180 DVMRP Multicast Routes Page Parameters seese 7 247 Table 7 181 DVMRP Prune Statistics Page Parameter esse es esse ee 7 248 Table B 1 Gigabit Ethernet Switch LED Indicators B 1 Table B 2 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet Switch LED Indicators B 2 Table B 3 Stacking LED Activity ees ee ee ee ee Re ee Re Re ee Re ee B 2 Table B 4 SBM IBS 001 InfiniBand Switch L
170. et Pass Received Authentication Get Data Received Authentication Errors Received Authentication Follows Received Authentication Restart Received Authentication Session Timeouts Authorization Requests Authorization Pass Add Received Authorization Pass Reply Received Authorization Fails Received Authorization Errors Received Authorization Follows Received Authorization Session Timeouts Accounting Start Requests Accounting WD Requests Accounting Stop Requests Accounting Success Received Accounting Errors Received oSoscsonconsosnonononononoooos Clicking the TACACS link brings up the TACACS STATISTICS page The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 138 TACACS Statistics Page Parameters Parameter Authentication Starts Request Authentication Continues Request Authentication Enables Request Authentication Aborts Request Authentication Pass Received Authentication Fails Received Authentication Get User Received Authentication Get Pass Received Description This parameter specifies the number of authentication starts requested This parameter specifies the number of authentication continues requested This parameter specifies the number of authentication enables requested This parameter specifies the number of authentication aborts requested This parameter specifies the number of authentication passes received This parameter specifies the numb
171. eter specifies the delay that needs to be enabled for RIP to split dip y the periodic update packets before they are sent out Auto summary status This parameter enables or disables the Auto summary feature 7 123 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Interfaces Figure 7 110 RIP Interface Page RIP Interface Clicking the INTERFACE tab brings up the RIP INTERFACE page Figure 7 110 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 85 Table 7 85 RIP Interface Page Parameters Interface Status Default Route Installation Receive Version This parameter specifies the Interface ID for which RIP needs to be configured This parameter specifies the admin status of the interface This parameter specifies whether Default Route Installation can be done or not This parameter is similar to SEND VERSION but it allows you to choose the RIP packets to be received as either RIPV1 RIPV2 both RIPv1 and RIPv2 or None 7 124 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 85 RIP Interface Page Parameters Continued Update Timer AS a specifies the time interval between successive RIP Neighbors List Figure 7 111 RIP Neighbor List Page RIP Neighbour List Clicking the NEIGHBORS tab brings up the RIP NEIGHBOR LIST page Figure 7 111 which is used to configure the RIP neighbors by configuring their IP address The single parameter for this page is IP ADDRES
172. ettings Page Parameters The target parameter is an unique name that specifies SNMP target Parameter Name information to be used in the generation of SNMP messages The SECURITY MODEL is used when generating SNMP messages using this Security Model entry SECURITY LEVEL specifies the level of security used when generating SNMP messages Security Level SNMP User Seitings Figure 7 32 SNMP Security Settings Page SNMP Security Settings Clicking the USER tab brings up the SNMP SECURITY SETTINGS page Figure 7 32 which configures users configured in the SNMP for the User based Security Model The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 22 7 38 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 22 SNMP Security Settings Page Parameters User Name USER NAME is the User based Security model dependent security ID Authentication Ke The AUTHENTICATION KEY is the secret authentication key used for y messages sent on behalf of this user to from the SNMP Privacy Ke PRIVACY KEY is an indication of whether or not messages sent on behalf of Wey this user to from the SNMP are protected from disclosure SNMP Trap Settings Figure 7 33 SNMP Trap Settings Page SNMP Trap Settings Clicking the TRAP MANAGER tab brings up the SNMP TRAP SETTINGS page Figure 7 33 which configures the set of management targets that must receive notifications The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 23
173. f paths towards the spanning tree root which include this port Priority Displays the priority of this port This is the value of the priority field contained in the first octet of the Port ID Edge This indicates if this port is the edge port Once configured as an edge port the port immediately transitions to the forwarding state It is available only when the port is directly connected to an end terminal or a file server that has no influence on the spanning tree configuration Since ports 11 to 24 are connected to blade server NIC ports all of those ports can be configured as an Edge port P2P This indicates if this port is a point to point link If you connect a port to another port though a point to point link and the local port becomes a designated port it negotiates a rapid transition with the other port to ensure a loop free topology Status This displays the RSTP port status Role This displays the role of this port To modify the PORT SETTINGS for each port click on the EDIT link next to PORT SETTING The RAPID SPANNING TREE PORT SETTINGS screen Figure 6 19 will appear Figure 6 19 Rapid Spanning Tree Port Settings TAI 1009 GYVVIIVVIIVIVIVVIIVVIVWVO UPERMICRO ussssessasssssaesasaeeasae EE III EES IE 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Rapid Spanning Tree Port Settings System Port Stat
174. face wists Acs ede Gea ntm hier 7 134 OSPF NeighDOE EE sy Re alice ae 7 135 OSPF RRD Route Configuration 7 136 OSPF Area Aggregation ee ee ee ee ee Re ee Re ke ee Re ee 7 137 Table of Contents External Aggregation sss 7 138 OSPF VS eh sessed A a a Se a ed ee a Ga a 7 140 OSPFv3 Basic Settings 7 140 Interface eh heed ce a ete i ae ee ect 7 141 AR ER EE AE ON 7 143 OSPF V3 External Aggregation i ees see ee ke ee Re ee Re Re ee 7 144 ele RE OE RE OR A EE tan d 7 146 BGP Basic Settings a nt ee eg es eed decide Mie uns 7 146 BGP Peer Configuration 7 147 BGP MED Configuration 7 148 Local Preference cionado nando EERS rtorras 7 149 BGP RE RE cs ee 7 151 Route Aggregation ns 7 152 Advanced BGP Configuration 7 153 BGP Community Management ee ee ke Re ee Re ee Re ee 7 154 el AR OR eles en ade EE EE NR EE 7 155 RRD Basic Settings 21 23 28 ER SEER Mes Mn SE oe EKG REED tete RR ee 7 156 le ER IE EI AE EE RE OE EE et 7 157 PRIP 2s RE ER EE OE EEN OE OR ER 7 158 OP Pu EE EE EE N 7 159 els OR AE HO EE EE aient sl 7 160 ARDE Basic Settings iis 2er latente edie SEEK De ade 7 160 al RR EE OR EE OR 7 161 RRD VE OSPF wtih ee ee ee dai inner tee ER eg 7 162 RRD RIP Him ER RE ER OR ON 7 163 MG ER AE OE EI ER N 7 164 VRRP BasicSetiNdS au EER Ke dan ites ERK ESE ESE DER EE SE RA ER 7 164 VRRP Settings RE io 7 165 7 7 EE EE EE EE 7 166 GMP lee RE RE EE EI N 7 166 IGMP Snooping C
175. fies the number of topology change notifications transmitted This parameter specifies the number of invalid configuration BPDUs received This parameter specifies the number of times protocol migration happened This parameter specifies the operational status of edge port 7 207 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual MSTP Statistics The MSTP Statistics link allows you to view MSTP statistics through the following pages MSTP Information on page 7 208 MSTP CIST Statistics on page 7 209 MSTP MSTI Port Statistics on page 7 210 MSTP Information Figure 7 181 MSTP Information Page MSTP Information Clicking the INFORMATION tab brings up the MSTP INFORMATION page Figure 7 137 which displays MSTP statistics The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 13 Table 7 150 MSTP Information Page Parameters Bridge Address This parameter specifies the Bridge Address Regional Root This parameter specifies the Regional root Regional Root Cost This parameter specifies the Regional root cost Hold Time This parameter specifies the hold time in seconds 7 208 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 150 MSTP Information Page Parameters Continued Parameter Description Max Age This parameter specifies the maximum age in seconds Forward Delay This parameter specifies the forward delay in seconds CIST Time Since Topology This parameter specifies t
176. figuration for the switch This can be accomplished through the following two pages RIP6 Interface on page 7 128 Filters on page 7 129 RIP6 Interface Figure 7 114 RIP6 Interface Configuration Page RIP6 Interface Configuration Clicking the RIP6 INTERFACE tab brings up the RIP6 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 114 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 88 Table 7 88 RIP6 Interface Configuration Page Parameters Interface ID Specifies the Interface Id for which RIPv6 needs to be configured Prof ID This parameter indicates the Index of the Address Profile entry Def Rt Adv This parameter indicates the default router lifetime to be placed in the Router Advertisements sent on the interface 7 128 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 88 RIP6 Interface Configuration Page Parameters Continued Per Updt Timer lid specifies the time interval between successive RIP6 i This parameter specifies the time interval after which the routes are Route Age Time flushed Filters Figure 7 115 RIP6 Filter Configuration Page RIP6 Filter Configuration Ss Lin Add Reset Clicking the FILTERS tab brings up the RIP6 FILTER CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 115 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 89 7 129 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 89 RIP6 Filter Configuration Page Parameters Filter Address This parameter
177. figured as master The slave switches will not allow you to configure anything except stacking disabled To login to slave switches use a login name as stackuser and password as stack123 Removing a stacked switch emove a switch from stacking follow the below recommended procedure Disconnect stacking cables Reboot the removed switch as a standalone switch Disable stacking Execute the no stack command Reboot the switch again to operate as regular stand alone switch NOTE When a switch is moved from stacking to stand alone mode the saved stacking configurations can not be loaded in stand alone mode When stacking is disabled the switch software renames the existing configuration file to avoid automatic restoration of stacking configurations on a stand alone switch 7 57 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual The following pages are available for configuring Stack settings e Stack Configuration on page 7 58 Stack Details on page 7 59 Stack Counters on page 7 61 Stack Configuration Figure 7 48 Stack Configuration Page Stack Configuration Reset Note Use the same number of stacking ports for all switches in stack Clicking the STACK SETTINGS tab brings up the STACK CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 48 which configures the stacking feature The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 35 Table 7 35 Stack Configuration Page Parameters This parameter defines a switch identifie
178. follow the below steps 1 Connect a PC to a network that is accessible to the switch For example connect a PC to any of the front panel ports of the switch and make sure the PC has an IP address on the same subnet as the switch management IP In the PC start a telnet client session with the switch management IP default IP is 192 168 100 102 This brings up the switch s command line interface for user login Enter username and password to login to the switch To view the switch configurations use show commands and to configure the switch type config term to get access to the configuration commands For help type or help Accessing CLI through a Serial Console To access command line via a serial console follow the below steps 1 2 Connect a PC serial port to the switch console port In the PC open any seral port access applications such as Hyperterminal or Term Term Choose the serial port connected with the switch and configure with the following parameters Baudrate 9600 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bit 1 This brings up the switch s command line interface for user login Enter username and password to login to the switch To view the switch configurations use show commands and to configure the switch type config term to get access to the configuration commands For help type or help 3 8 Chapter 3 Setup and Installation 3 3 SBM GEM X2C 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Firmwar
179. g open sources from OpenSSL OpenSSH and other open source communities and is configured using web browsers such as Internet Explorer The utility starts with a default IP address which is also the management IP address This IP address is essentially provided for remote management of this switch For managing the switch through web browsers type in the default IP address in your browser s web address in order to start accessing the switch For example if the management IP address of the switch is 192 168 1 1 the switch can be accessed through the Web browser by typing http 192 168 1 1 in the address space of the web browser The default management IP address for Supermicro Switch products is 192 168 100 102 This default IP address can be changed in the SYSTEM SETTINGS page in the System Management section Superblade Network Modules User s Manual The management interface for the SBM GEM X2C is the same as that for the Supermicro standalone SSE G24 TG4 and SSE G48 TG4 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet switch modules For the SSE G48 TG4 and SSE G24 TF4 switches you can connect to any of the front panel 1G ports or back panel 10G ports to manage the switch with the default management IP These switches will create VLAN 1 by default with this IP address including all 1G and 10G ports The SBM GEM X2C blade switch can be managed with the default IP through CMM Ethernet connections since the internal management Ethernet ports of the
180. ghbor solicits 7 223 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 161 ICMPv6 Statistics Page Parameters Continued In Redirects Out Messages Out Dest Unreaches Out Param Probs Out Echos Out Route Solicits Out Neighbour Solicts Out Redirects In Bad Code This parameter specifies the number of redirect packets received This parameter specifies the number of messages transmitted This parameter specifies the number of destination unreachable messages transmitted This parameter specifies the number of parameters probed This parameter specifies the number of echo requests transmitted This parameter specifies the number of transmitted router solicits This parameter specifies the number of transmitted neighbor solicits This parameter specifies the number of redirect packets transmitted This parameter specifies the number of bad code packets 7 224 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware RIP Statistics Figure 7 193 RIP Interface Statistics Page RIP Interface Statistics Clicking the RIP link brings up the RIP INTERFACE STATISTICS page Figure 7 193 which displays RIP statistics The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 162 Table 7 162 RIP Interface Statistics Page Parameters IP Address This parameter specifies the IP address Received Bad Routes This parameter specifies the number of received bad routes 7 225 Superblade
181. guration Page Parameters System Control This parameter Starts or Shutsdown IGS in the switch This parameter enables or disables IGMP snooping operationally in the Operational Status switch To enable IGS GMRP status must be Disabled This parameter specifies the IGMP snooping multicast forwarding mode Snooping Mode which can be configured using the Destination IP Address or the Destination MAC Address 7 167 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 118 IGMP Snooping Configuration Page Parameters Continued Retry Count This parameter specifies the maximum number of group specific queries y sent on a port on the reception of an IGMPv2 leave message IGMP Snooping Timer Figure 7 148 IGMP Snooping Timer Configuration Page IGMP Snooping Timer Configuration Clicking the TIMER tab brings up the IGMP SNOOPING TIMER CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 148 which configures IGMP snooping timers The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 119 Table 7 119 IGMP Snooping Timer Configuration Page Parameters Router Port Purgelnterval This parameter specifies the interval for which the learnt router port will be Secs purged The default value is 125 seconds 7 168 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 119 IGMP Snooping Timer Configuration Page Parameters Continued This parameter specifies the interval within which the next report messages for the same multica
182. hapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware COSQ Weight and Bandwidth Configuration Figure 7 44 COSQ Weight and Bandwidth Configurations Page Trafficc COSQ weight and Bandwidth Configurations LLC Clicking the Cosa TRAFFIC CLASS tab brings up the COSQ WEIGHT AND BANDWIDTH CONFIGURATIONS page Figure 7 44 which allows you to configure the weight and bandwidth for CoS Queues The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 33 Table 7 33 COSQ Weight and Bandwidth Configurations Page Parameters COSQ Queue TS paramgisr allows you to select between 0 to 7 for your COSQ QUEUE COSQ Min Bandwidth This parameter configures minimum bandwidth between 1 and 262143 COSQ Flag Use this parameter to set a flag for this queue 7 51 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual NTP Settings SUPERMICRO SWITCH SBM GEM X2C SMIS Clicking the NTP link brings up the NTP SETTINGS page Figure 7 45 NTP Settings Page NTP Settings NTP Client Timezone Settings Ntp Status DISABLED How Offset 0 Receive Server Update BROADCAST y Minutes Offset 0 Apply Set Timezone NTP Servers NTP Server Keys Server IP Address Key Id Key Key String Interval Add Key Prefered Add Server lete K Select Server 1P Keylinterval Preferred poster Update Delete Server which configures the Network Time Protocol NTP The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7
183. he number of seconds since topology last Change changed Topology Changes This parameter specifies the number of topology changes MSTP CIST Statistics Figure 7 182 MSTP CIST Port Statistics Page Refresh Support Help About Log Out SWITCH SBM GEM X2C sus I Home MSTP CIST Port Statistics gt System Mgmt gt Layer2 Mgmt n gt Layer3 Mgmt Gi0 1 Ex0 3 gt Multicast gt Pass Reset Stabstcs Radus TACACS me RMON ived Transmitted Transmitted Transmitted Transmitted o SNMP N MST BPDUs RST BPDUs Config TCN BPDUs Invi Invalid AGENT is BPDUs BPDUs M RST AGENTX BPDUs BPDUs BP VAN RS Go o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 lA Go2 o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 pe Go3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Feed Gos 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 ne GOS o o 0 0 o o 0 o 0 o 0 0 0 En Gos o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IGMP Snooping GOT o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 Pm Gos o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DVMRP Goo o o 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 Goio o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 GOM o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Gon o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Gon o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Gon 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Gos o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 Gi0 16 0 0 0 0 485 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ExO1 o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E02 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 Clicking the CIST PORT STATISTICS tab brings up the MSTP CIST PORT STATISTICS page Figure 7 182 which displays STP CIST port level statistics The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 151 Table 7 151 MSTP CIST Port Statistic
184. he port is a member of the port channel but is currently in a standby state Down The port s Oper Status is Down Port State Info Figure 7 85 LA Port State Machine Information Page Port Statelnto LA Port StateMachine Information Clicking the PORT STATE INFO tab brings up the LA PORT STATE MACHINE INFORMATION page Figure 7 85 which displays Link Aggregation state machine information It displays the aggregation state information for every port channel 7 98 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Load Balancing Figure 7 86 LA Load Balancing Policy Page LA Load Balancing Policy Clicking the LOAD BALANCING tab brings up the LA LOAD BALANCING POLICY page Figure 7 86 which allows you to choose the selection policy for load distribution on the aggregated links The selection policy can be one of the following Source MAC based Destination MAC based both Source and Destination MAC Source IP address Destination IP address or both IP addresses 7 99 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 802 1x The 802 1x link provides link to the following configuration pages Basic Settings on page 7 100 Port Settings on page 7 101 Timers on page 7 103 Local AS on page 7 104 MAC Session Info on page 7 105 Basic Settings Figure 7 87 802 1x Basic Settings Page 802 1x Basic Settings Clicking the BASIC SETTINGS tab brings up the 802 1x BASIC SETTINGS page
185. he screen Figure 3 6 You may make changes in the configuration of the switch module in this panel to your needs 3 6 Chapter 3 Setup and Installation Figure 3 6 Gigabit Switch Panel GB Switch 1 g us Status WebSuperSmart Configuration Power Status 3 On Username and Password Error LED Normal LE Qox WSS IP 192 168 166 Switch Temp Normal 2 5V Status Nannal Netmask 255 255 255 0 1 25V Status O Normal Gateway 192 168 1 1 ever Canna Datetime 12 19 2007 08 58 47 EE oe Get Update Web Power On Power Off Reset Voltage Temperature Ss gum A eae Ca Switch 1251 257 Address Defaults The following are the default addresses that are initially set Afterwards you can change these values within the program Table 3 1 SBM GEM 001 Switch Module Address Default Settings Address Default Setting Default IP Address 192 168 100 102 Default Gateway Address 192 168 100 1 Default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 change the IP address of one from the default so that both switches have NOTE If two switches are installed in a SuperBlade system you will have to V4 unique addresses r 3 7 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Command Line Configuring the 1 10G Ethernet switch SBM GEM X2C can be done using a command line via telnet or by using the serial console interface Accessing CLI through Telnet To access command line via telnet
186. hown in Table 7 13 Table 7 65 802 1x Timer Configuration Page Parameters Parameter Description This parameter is the index of the port for which fields such as QUIET Port PERIOD TRANSMIT PERIOD and such are configured This parameter specifies the duration for which the authenticator will be Quiet Period Seconds silent and will not attempt to acquire a supplicant It can be configured to any value in the range from 1 to 65535 seconds This parameter specifies the time period used by the Authenticator State Transmit Period Seconds machine to define when the EAPOL PDU is to be transmitted It can be configured to any value in the range from 7 to 65535 seconds Re authentication Period This parameter specifies the time between periodic re authentication of the Seconds supplicant 7 103 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Local AS Figure 7 90 Local Authentication Server Configuration Page Local Authentication Server Configuration Clicking the LOCAL AS tab brings up the LOCAL AUTHENTICATION SERVER CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 21 which configures Local Authentication Server information The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 13 Table 7 66 Local Authentication Server Configuration Page Parameters This parameter specifies the identity of the user who is seeking User Name authentication and is set by a string of not more than 20 printable characters This parameter
187. hrough a number of states while it processes BPDUs and determines the network topology There are five port states in the legacy 802 1d STP disabled blocking listening learning and forwarding The RSTP combines the disabled blocking and listening states used in 802 1d STP and creates a single state Discarding Table 6 7 lists the comparison of port states between 802 1d STP and 802 1w RSTP Table 6 7 Comparison of Port States State Displayed 802 1d STP 802 1w RSTP Discarding Disabled Discarding Discarding Blocking Discarding Discarding Listening Discarding Learning Learning Learning Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding RSTP Port Roles RSTP will assign port roles for each port during the process receiving the BPDUs Based on its port role a port can either send or receive BPDUs and forward or block data traffic Root the port that provides the lowest cost path when the switch forwards packets to the root switch Designated the port closest to the root switch and forwarding traffic toward the root switch and sending BPDUs in a link segment Each designated port is ina forwarding state Alternate this port provides an alternate path to the root bridge This path is different than using the root port The alternate port is in a blocking state Backup the port provides a backup redundant path to a link segment to which another switch port already connects This is a special case when two or more po
188. icking the BASIC SETTINGS tab brings up the RMON Basic SETTINGS page Figure 7 35 which enables disables the RMON feature using the RMON Status parameter 7 42 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Event Configuration Figure 7 36 Event Configuration Settings Page Event Configuration Clicking the EVENTS tab brings up the EVENT CONFIGURATIONS page Figure 7 36 which configures RMON events The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 25 Table 7 25 Event Configuration Page Parameters This parameter specifies the index to the Events table This parameter specifies the event configured This can be a Log an SNMP Trap Both or None For the event type to display TRAP and Log and TRAP Community must be configured This parameter indicates the owner of this event 7 43 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual RMON Alarm Configuration Figure 7 37 RMON Alarm Configuration Page RMON Alarm Configuration Clicking the ALARM tab brings up the RMON ALARM CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 37 which configures RMON Alarm paramters The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 26 Table 7 26 RMON Alarm Configuration Page Parameters Index This parameter specifies the table index Variable This parameter specifies the MIB object on which the alarm is set If the startup alarm is set as Rising Alarm and this threshold is reached an Bising are hele alarm is raised Indicate
189. igabit Switch Panel 3 7 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Displayed Text for Rebooting iese ke ee Re ee ee Re 3 10 Setting Hardware Information 3 11 SBM IBS 001 InfiniBand Switch Module 4 2 SBM IBS Q3618 Q3616 InfiniBand Switch Module 4 3 SBM IBS Q3616M InfiniBand Switch Module 4 4 SBM IBP D14 InfiniBand Pass Through Triple Wide Module 4 6 SBM GEM 001 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Module 5 1 SBM GEM X2C 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Module Ports O AE ihe ED DO RE Bos E ee id eet 5 3 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 SBM GEM 002 Gigabit Pass through Module 5 5 SBM XEM 002 10 Gigabit Pass through Module 5 7 Figure 5 5 SBM GEP T20 Gigabit Pass through Module iese esse ese eek ee 5 8 Figure 5 6 SBM GEP T20 Installed in Enclosure 5 9 Figure 6 1 Switch Status Screen 6 2 Figure 6 2 Switch System Management Screen 6 2 Figure 6 3 Port Status Screen 6 4 Figure 6 4 Jumbo Frame Setting Screen 6 5 Figure 6 5 Port Configuration Sereen iese ce eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 6 6 Figure 6 6 Statistics Screen 6 7 Figure 6 7 Port Statistics Screen oe ee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 6 8 Figure 6 8 VLAN Screen 6 10 Figure 6 9 Creating a New VLAN ee ee ee Re Re ee Re ee Re ed ee ee 6 12 Figure 6 10 New VLAN Scre
190. iguration Page Parameters sesse 7 135 Table 7 95 OSPF RRD Route Configuration Page Parameters 7 136 Table 7 96 OSPF Area Aggregation Page Parameters esse ese ees 7 137 Table 7 97 OSPF As External Aggregation Configuration Page Parametersyin EE OR ERA EE ER N IE a 7 138 Table 7 98 OSPFv3 Basic Settings Page Parameters 7 140 Table 7 99 Interface Settings Page Parameters 7 142 Table 7 100 OSPFv3 Area Settings Page Parameter sees esse ees ee 7 143 Table 7 101 OSPF AS External Aggregation Configuration Page add RE NR EE ibn sae N AE ER OO EE 7 144 Table 7 102 BGP Basic Settings Page Parameters see ese ee ee ee 7 147 Table 7 103 BGP Peer Configuration Page Parameters 7 148 Table 7 104 BGP MED Configuration Page Parameters esse sesse esse ees 7 149 Table 7 105 BGP Local Preference Configuration Page Parameters 7 150 Table 7 106 BGP Filter Configuration Page Parameters esse esse ese sees 7 151 Table 7 107 BGP Route Aggregation Configuration Page Parameters 7 152 Table 7 108 Advanced BGP Configuration Page Parameters sesse 7 153 Table 7 109 BGP Community Management Page Parameters 7 155 Table 7 110 RRD Basic Settings Page Parameters esse se ee ee 7 156 Table 7 111 RRD BGP Configuration Page Parameters esse sies esse ese 7 157 Table 7 112 RRD RIP Configuration Page Parameters
191. in Table 7 8 Table 7 8 SSH Configuration Page Parameters SSH Version The default for this parameter is v2 You can choose to configure this as compatible with v7 instead ee This parameter s default is HMAC SHA1 You can instead choose to aileen configure it as HMAC SHA1 or HMAC MD5 or both 7 21 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual SSLConfiguration Figure 7 18 SSL Configuraiton Page SSL Configuration Server Certificate Server Certificate not configured Clicking the SSL tab brings up the SSL CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 18 which allows you to configure SSL Secure Sockets Layer parameters and generate SSL certificates for HTTPS To configure SSL and enable HTTPS follow the procedure below using this page Configuring SSL and Enabling HTTPS 1 Configure CIPHER SUITE and CRYPTO KEY RSA with your chosen parameters 2 Create a certificate request by entering the subject name and clicking on the CREATE button 3 When the page reloads the text box below the CREATE button will display a certificate request Copy and paste these contents to a text file that says a csr 4 To generate an SSL certificate the openssl application can be used The sub steps below can be executed in any Linux machine to generate SSL certificates For other openssl implementations refer to the openss documentation to find the equivalent steps for them a Execute the below command in the Linux shell
192. ines Always disconnect power cables before installing or removing any components from the computer Disconnect the power cable before installing or removing any cables from the system Make sure that the add on card is securely and properly installed on the motherboard to prevent damage to the system due to power shortage A 1 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual A 2 Mezzanine HCA Cards Available Mezzanine HCA cards for use with the SuperBlade InfiniBand switch are shown in the following sections NOTE All images and layouts shown in this user s guide are based upon the latest PCB Revision available at the time of publishing The card you have Jf received may or may not look exactly the same as the graphics shown in this manual AOC IBH 001 Mezzanine HCA Card The AOC IBH 001 card has dual 4x DDR IB ports and uses a Mellanox Infinihost Il Ex DDR chip This card is no longer in production EOL but users of this card can consider replacement with the AOC IBH XDD Mezzanine HCA card as an alternative Figure A 1 AOC IBH 001 Mezzanine HCA Card Ra MA DE uuz sl A 2 Appendix A HCA Mezzanine Cards AOC IBH 002 Mezzanine HCA Card The AOC IBH 002 card has a single 4x DDR 20 Gbps IB port and uses a Mellanox InfiniHost Ill Lx DDR chip Figure A 2 AOC IBH 002 Mezzanine HCA Card A 3 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual AOC IBH 003 Mezzanine HCA Card The AOC IBH 003 c
193. ing Select L2 to enable the mirroring Mirror This specifies a Mirror port to which ingress and egress traffic will be mirrored Mirror To This specifies the mirrored to port Apply This applies the mirror setting to the system 6 15 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 6 7 Quality of Service Quality of Service QoS helps a network user to reserve a guaranteed bandwidth for some critical application functions that require a high bandwidth and high priority Applications such as video audio streaming VoIP and video conferencing must have a certain amount of bandwidth to maintain their operation correctly QoS allows user to prioritize network traffic thereby providing better services for those applications with a higher priority The switch supports 802 1p priority queuing QoS based on the priority bit in a frame s VLAN header The 802 1p priority bit if present in the frame specifies the priority of the frame during forwarding The 802 1p standard uses eight 0 7 priority levels for network traffic Priority level 7 is the highest priority Priority level 0 is the lowest level Priority Queues Four priority queues are provided for each port The priority queues are labeled from 3 to 0 Priority queue 3 has highest priority while queue 0 has lowest priority The switch transmits the frames based on the priority of the queue not the priority tag Frames ina higher priority queue are served more often than frames in
194. irst port number is top port second port number is bottom port QDR Switch Reset Button a If the fault LED goes on the QDR switch operation is stopped It then needs a hardware reset or a power off cycle to bring it back into normal operation b Ifthe Green LED is blinking the QDR switch is overheated Please check the air fan and vent condition If the fault LED goes on at the same time a hard reset or a power off cycle needs to be initiated Table 4 4 SBM IBS Q3618 Q3616 InfiniBand Module Features Feature Description Internal External Ports oo 18 20 4X QDR copper ports External 18 16 4X QDR copper Bandwidth 4X QDR 40 Gbps non blocking architecture for 2 88 Tbps total bandwidth 36 port Latency 120 ns port to port switch latency Power Consumption 100W Operating System Firmware upgradable 4 3 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 4 4 SBM IBS Q3616M 4X QDR InfiniBand Switch Module Figure 4 3 SBM IBS Q3616M InfiniBand Switch Module 11 12 13 14 16 16 Table 4 5 SBM IBS Q361M InfiniBand Module Interface Item GO OND 0 A OND a o Description System error Fault LED Red System status Ready LED Green External InfiniBand Port 16 QSFP ports for Q3636 and 18 QSFP ports for Q3618 Per Port Dual color LED PHY link Green Logic link Amber ACT blinking Green Amber Module Release Handle Internal CMM Module Ethernet Port Port Numbers First po
195. is booting its firmware Boot process failed Switch is properly booted and operational Switch has power and is operational There is a problem with the power being supplied to the switch Physical link established Physical link error poor connection quality Port is off or has no physical connection Logic link established no activity Data transferring to from the port Logical link is down B 4 Appendix C Installing Triple Wide Bays This appendix describes the setup for triple wide module bays used by the InfiniBand pass through module See Chapter 4 for further details on InfiniBand modules C 1 Installing a Triple Wide Module Bay Use the procedure below for installing a triple wide module bay in a Superblade chassis Installing a Triple Wide Module Bay 1 Remove the four screws that secure the inner enclosure to the main enclosure Slide the inner enclosure outward depressing the locking tabs on both sides to pull it completely out 2 Remove any single wide modules that are occupying the bays you wish to modify to a triple wide bay See Figure C 1 Step 1 amp 2 for details Figure C 1 Step 1 amp 2 Screws 4pcs C 1 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 3 Inthe module bay you wish to expand to triple wide remove the two screws that secure the center support to the inner enclosure then take out the center support 4 Remove the two screws
196. is is a pass through module and just like the SBM GEM 002 1Gb Ethernet Pass through Module model described above it is not configurable With this module Blade 1 would be connected directly to port 1 Blade 2 to port 2 and so on If you are connected to 10 blades then ports 11 through 14 are not connected 5 6 Chapter 5 Ethernet Modules Temperature and voltage of the pass through module are read through the CMM module The LED s of the pass through for a blade are only lit when the blade is on Like the other switches this pass through module is a hot pluggable module See Figure 5 4 Table 5 9 and Table 5 10 for switch details NOTE The SBM XEM 002 10 Gigabit pass through module must be connected to another 10 Gigabit Ethernet switch module in order to operate If you connect it to a 10 100 1000 switch it will not work Figure 5 4 SBM XEM 002 10 Gigabit Pass through Module q LA el Table 5 9 SBM XEM 002 10 Gigabit Pass through Module Interface Item Description En Module Release Handles 10 Gbp s Uplink SFP Ports RJ45 Ethernet Port for conncection to console for mini CMM Initiation OK LED for mini CMM Reset Button for mini CMM a A N Table 5 10 SBM XEM 002 10 Gigabit Pass through Module Features Feature Description Internal Fourteen 10 Gbps downlink ports to internal 10 Gbps Mezzanine ternal External Pens Add on Card External fourteen 10 Gbps SFP uplink
197. istics Port From 01 M To 01 VLAN Cost 1 200 000 000 auto Trunking Priority 0 240 lo Mirror Edge No P2P Force Yes v L2 Management Apply Select a group of port numbers that you want to configure Setting the COST to zero or checking AUTO will automatically set the default value depending on the link speed The default cost is 20000 for a Gigabit port and is 100000 for a 100Mbps port 6 25 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 6 11 IEEE 802 1x IEEE 802 1x is a client server based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized user devices from connecting to the LAN through publicly accessible ports This port based access control is accomplished by using a RADIUS server that is connected to a gigabit switch management port to authenticate client users trying to access a network through the switch The gigabit switch will relay Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPoL packets between the user client and the RADIUS server The 802 1x protocol consists of three components client authenticator and authentication server The Authentication Server is a remote device that runs the RADIUS server program Windows 2000 2003 IAS freeRADIUS from open source The role of the Authentication Server is to certify the identity of a client attempting to access the network By exchanging secure information between the RADIUS server and the client through EAPoL
198. itch This page provides three main features Save Configuration e File Copy File Management Save Configuration You can save a currently running switch configuration in the following three ways e Save Startup Config This option saves the currently running configuration in a local flash file with the file name configured as a startup configuration file Save Flash File This option saves the currently running configuration in local flash file with a user specified file name Save Remotely This option saves the currently running configuration into a remote TFTP server You need to provide the IP address and file name of the TFTP server for this option The total configuration memory space and available free space are also displayed for your reference 7 12 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware File Copy You can copy a local file to or from a remote TFTP server This feature is useful to create a backup of configuration files remotely and also to download configuration files from remote computers to the switch You need to provide a local file name and also the remote TFTP server s IP address and file name for this feature File Management This section displays information about the configuration files stored in the switch and allows you to do any of the following actions You can select one or more files and delete them e You can choose a Startup Configuration file from this file list e You
199. itted This parameter specifies the number of the EAPOL logoff packet Eapol Logoff FrTx transmitted 7 215 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 156 802 1x Supplicant Session Statistics Page Parameters Continued This parameter specifies the number of the EAPOL response packet frame Eapol Resp Frix transmitted This parameter specifies the number of the EAPOL request frame receieved Eapol Req FrRx This parameter specifies the number of EAPOL packets received with an BABER nin invalid length Last Eapol FrSource This parameter specifies the source of the last EAPOL packet Mac Session Statistics Figure 7 188 MAC Session Statistics Page MAC Session Statistics Clicking the MAC SESSION STATS tab brings up the MAC SESSION STATISTICS page Figure 7 188 which displays statistics information about 802 1x MAC sessions The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 157 7 216 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 157 MAC Session Statistics Page Parameters Supplicant MacAddr This parameter specifies the supplicant MAC address Frames Tx This parameter specifies the number of packets transmitted Session Terminte Cause This parameter specifies the reason for session termination 7 217 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual IP The IP link allows you to view IP statistics through the following pages ARP Cache o
200. itted by the terms of said license IN NO EVENT WILL SUPERMICRO BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL SPECULATIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR DOCUMENTATION EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN PARTICULAR SUPERMICRO SHALL NOT HAVE LIABILITY FOR ANY HARDWARE SOFTWARE OR DATA STORED OR USED WITH THE PRODUCT INCLUDING THE COSTS OF REPAIRING REPLACING INTEGRATING INSTALLING OR RECOVERING SUCH HARDWARE SOFTWARE OR DATA Any disputes arising between manufacturer and customer shall be governed by the laws of Santa Clara County in the State of California USA The State of California County of Santa Clara shall be the exclusive venue for the resolution of any such disputes Super Micro s total liability for all claims will not exceed the price paid for the hardware product FCC Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer s instruction manual may cause harmful interference with radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interfer
201. kets per second for storm control The figure below Storm Control Rate shows all available options 10 pps 100 pps 1000 pps 5000 pps 10000 pps and 15000 pps 6 9 L2 Management L2 management provides a way to add delete and look up MAC addresses in the L2 address table The switch supports 8192 L2 address table entries each specifying a MAC address VLAN ID destination port number trunk ID and Rtag The switch supports store and forward mode switching After a frame is received its source MAC address MACSA and destination MAC address MACDA are retrieved Depending on the port state the MACSA and port number may be used to dynamically update the L2 address table The MACDA may be used to determine the frame s destination port User can also statically add a MAC address to the L2 address table To add a static entry into the L2 ADDRESS table click on the ADD link on the L2 ADDRESS MANAGEMENT screen as shown in Figure 6 16 6 19 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Figure 6 16 L2 Management Screen L2 Address Management System Port Show L2 Addresses SHOW Statistics VLAN Trunking Address Lookup MAC 00 00 00 00 00 00 vin 1 Lookup Static Address ADD Item Source MAC Port Trunk RTag Delete Spanning Tree 802 1x IGMP Snooping To remove the specified static MAC address from the table click the DELETE link for that MAC address as shown in Figure
202. les User s Manual MAC Session Info 7 105 El ER EE OR ea re ee AR GR ete 7 106 Unicast dl SE RE RE NE ER OER 7 106 Me da ER IE ER ORE N NR es 7 107 7 6 Layer 3 Management 7 108 Pise A des aioe as eee lees 7 109 Vlan Interface OR N EE ein de 7 109 IP V4 Interface Settings iese se de ee Re ee Re Re ee ee ee 7 110 IP ROUTE vs 7 111 LoopBack Basic Settings ese ee ke Re Re ee ee 7 112 IPG fac EE Dun ae so ee is ee A oen EE GEE Be a 7 113 IPv6 Route Configuration 7 113 IPV6 Interfaces or N EE EE EE iai 7 114 sisie EE ER nn EE 7 115 Address Settings 7 116 Address Profile ERG EG DE ee ie aie genie 7 117 AI STA Ae le eee a Aone 7 118 DHCP Servers ss EE DEE tn Mt A 7 119 DHGP Basic Settings ui gs eae a il Pee 7 119 Pool Settings sci iste AHA RA ek 7 120 DHCP ER EER EE RE E an 7 121 DHCP Relay Basic Settings 7 121 Interface Settings oranini na win GREG ile 7 122 RIP set EE a Men a TE OS 7 123 RIP Basie Settings 54 4 tito deine 7 123 Interlace Snin a A a ES 7 124 NeighborsLISb ii a ei oie di dada 7 125 Security Settings chan inn Ad ib 7 126 Address SummarizatiON ees esse ee ee Re RA Re Re Re Re Re 7 127 alle EE N EA EE N 7 128 BIP6 Interface es Die nde os eee De acne sine ie 7 128 al RE RE EER HO ON eet 7 129 BAAT AE EER LE EE EE NR 7 131 OSPF Basic SettiNngS ses ss se EE Ge Ee ed SG sg Bep Ee eg Re eg 7 131 ATEN RE EED Ee A EE Me eo eae oe 7 132 interlace EE OE A MEE 7 133 Virtual Initer
203. link Port Status LEDs Link Activity and Speed 1 Gbps RJ45 Uplink Ports 2 CX4 10 Gbps Uplink Ports 2 SFP 10 Gbps Uplink Port OO n Do A DY o Module Release Handle 5 3 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 5 5 SBM GEM X2C 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Module Features Chipset Bandwidth Jumbo Frame Support Protocols Operating System Broadcom BCM56313 24 Gbps non blocking Up to 9 kb Spanning Tree Rapid Spanning Tree Multiple Spanning Tree IGMP snooping and 802 1x Firmware see Section 3 3 SBM GEM X2C 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Firmware on page 3 9 for details LED Indicators LED indicators for the SBM GEM X2C 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet switch module are listed and described in Table B 2 of Appendix B Ports The SBM GEM X2C 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet switch module contains several front mounted ports as described below in Table 5 6 Table 5 6 SBM GEM X2C Ports This port accepts an connector cable for uplink using RS 232 CX4 10 Gbps Ports These two ports accept a CX4 10GBase CX4 connectors for 10 Gbps uplink communications or for stacking Chapter 5 Ethernet Modules 5 3 SBM GEM 002 1Gb Ethernet Pass through Module The SBM GEM 002 Gigabit pass through module is a non configurable pass through module that includes fourteen 14 1 Gb s uplink RJ45 ports and fourteen 1 Gb s downlink ports for the SuperBlade s LAN interfaces Thi
204. list The LAYER 3 MANAGEMENT home page has links to all Layer 3 features 7 108 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware IP The IP link enables you to perform IP related configuration This can be done through the following pages Vian Interface on page 7 109 IP V4 Interface Settings on page 7 110 IP Route on page 7 111 LoopBack Basic Settings on page 7 112 Vian Interface Figure 7 95 VLAN Interface Basic Settings Page VLAN Interface Basic Settings Clicking the VLAN INTERFACE tab brings up the VLAN INTERFACE BASIC SETTINGS page Figure 7 95 which allows configuring of L3 VLAN interfaces The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 70 Table 7 70 VLAN Interface Basic Settings Page Parameters VLAN Interface This parameter specifies the VLAN identifier MTU This parameter specifies the maximum transfer unit size in bytes 7 109 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual IP V4 Interface Settings Figure 7 96 IPv4 Interface Settings Page IPv4 Interface Settings nom Jun 25000 an NE E Clicking the IPv4 ADDR CONF tab brings up the IPv4 INTERFACE SETTINGS page Figure 7 96 which allowsyou to configure the IP address for L3 VLANs The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 71 Table 7 71 IPv4 Interface Settings Page Parameters Interface VLAN ID This parameter specifies the VLAN interface Subnet Mask This parameter indicates
205. low from one VLAN to another VLAN unless there is a VLAN routing device to bridge them The switch also allows a user to configure the egress packets to either tagging or untagging The untagging feature of 802 1Q VLAN allows a user to hook up the port toa legacy switch that doesn t recognize 802 1Q tagging header in the packet Also the tagging feature allows VLANs to span into multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through physical connections between switches 6 11 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 6 4 Configuring a Static VLAN The switch currently supports static VLANs only To configure the VLAN click on the VLAN folder at the left hand side bar The IEEE802 1Q VLAN screen should appear as shown in Figure 6 8 It lists the entire current VLAN configuration and also allows a user to create a new VLAN or modify port membership of a VLAN The MEMBER PORTS indicates the number of member ports of the VLAN There are two color symbols for each port to indicate tagging or untagging of packets egress from the port Orange Indicates a tagged egress packet Teal Indicates an untagged egress packet Creating a New VLAN 1 Click on the CREATE NEW VLAN button The screen as shown in Figure 6 9 should appear 13999999993999399993399239933 1039999909999 UIAIAADADL UPERMICRO FILIAL Link DVVBVVWV9VIVWVWVVIVVVVWVIV VV 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN System
206. ly connected Using this parameter next Hop can be set as Self or Automatic By setting this field to Self you can make the switch the next hop for all the routes that it distributes to its peers This parameter specifies the maximum time interval between successive updates between any two BGP peers This parameter specifies the Hold time This is the timer interval that a BGP will wait before it decides that a connection to the peer is torn down This parameter represents the remote autonomous system number This parameter specifies the interval in seconds for the Minimum Route advertisement interval timer Status This parameter specifies the status of the entry BGP MED Configuration Figure 7 130 BGP MED Configuration Page Refresh Support Help About Log Out SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM X2C sms M un EN E Home System Mgmt gt Layer2 Mgmt v Layer3 Mgmt 1 DHCP Relay RIP RIPng OSPF OSPFv3 BGP RRD RAROS VRRP gt Multicast gt Statistics BGP MED Configuration MED ID Remote AS TP Address Prefix IP Address Prefix Length Intermediate AS Direction ne Value Preference False ADD Reset MED ID Remote AS IP Address ETER Di Preference Status 7 148 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Clicking the MULTI EXIT Disc tab brings up the BGP MED CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 130 which allows you to configure the MED value for routes learnt fr
207. m Settings cuina 7 9 System Version mesita 7 11 File Manage OR awed hai ie i en ee 7 12 Save Configuration EES Ee SE gee nan ni Mn 7 12 File COpY iiss N N e 7 13 File Management re ESE Ee ee i ere ES 7 13 Firmware Upgrade sun 7 14 Management Security 7 15 Management Security Basic Settings iese ee ee ke ee ee ee 7 15 Management User Account 7 16 RAS EE ee et UN 7 17 TACACS Global Settings ee ee ee Re Re RA ee Re 7 18 TACACS Server Configuration ee ee RA ee ee 7 19 IP Authorized Manager sees see ese ee ee ee AR Ge ee Ee ee ee ea 7 20 SSH Configurations en nial EE N 7 21 SSE CONTIQUIATION dc AE EE ae hee EE eee 7 22 LA EE RE eed ne EE EE 7 24 Syslog Configuration 7 24 Syslog Mail Configuration ee ee ee ek ee Re ee Re AR ee 7 25 oo TE EE EE EE N EE se 7 26 MAG Based ACL EE eg iba 7 26 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual IP Standard OER OR detec artes dete ie der te 7 27 IP Extended AGL EE Bern ive as ee ead a ee Gee 7 28 WEBGUI S tting AE RE EE EE AE N EE N 7 30 SNMP EED RE ER o ds 7 31 SNMP Community Settings ee Re Re ee Re ee 7 32 SNMP Group Settings ee ee Re Re ee ee ee ee ee ee 7 33 SNMP Group Access Settings esse ese ee ee ee Re Re ke ee ee ee 7 34 SNMP View Tree Settings Re ee ee Re ee ee 7 35 SNMP Target Address Settings 7 36 SNMP Target Parameter Settings 7 37 SNMP User SettingS sees ee ee ee Re rae in ee Re ee Re ee 7 38 SNMP Trap Settings iii
208. mber of seconds after an elected translator determines its services are no longer required in which it must continue to perform its translation duties This parameter specifies the type of metric OSPFv3 Metric External Type 1 External Type 2 advertised as a default route 7 143 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual OSPF V3 External Aggregation Figure 7 127 OSPF AS External Aggregation Configuration Page Agoreg OSPF As External Aggregation Configuration Clicking the EXT AGGREGATION tab brings up the OSPF AS EXTERNAL AGGREGATION CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 127 which allows you to configure OSPF external aggregation parameters The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 101 Table 7 101 OSPF AS External Aggregation Configuration Page Parameters Network This parameter specifies the external network address Area ID This parameter specifies the Area identifier 7 144 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 101 OSPF AS External Aggregation Configuration Page Parameters Translation This parameter enables or disables the translation 7 145 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual BGP The BGP link allows you to configure the BGP protocol Following are the configuration parameters available to manage BGP through this interface BGP Basic Settings on page 7 146 BGP Peer Configuration on page 7 147 BGP MED Configuration on page 7 1
209. me History Control Configuration System Mgmt System Settings File Management Index Firmware Upgrad penis Security Port GON y Buckets Requested Web Settings i SNMP Interval AGENT AGENTX Owner RMON Qos Add Reset NTP Stack gt Layer2 Mgmt Sel ae te gt Multicast Statistics Clicking the History tab brings up the HISTORY CONTROL CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 39 which configures RMON history parameters The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 28 Table 7 28 History Control Configuration Page Parameters Parameter Description Index This parameter specifies the index to the table This parameter specifies the SNMP object ID of the variable for which the BENS SI SS history is being collected Indicates the number of buckets to be configured for collecting the RMON Buckets Requested statistics This parameter specifies the time interval between two successive polls to MOE wel collect the statistics Owner Denotes the owner of the RMON group of statistics 7 46 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 28 History Control Configuration Page Parameters Continued This parameter specifies the status of the History Control entry as either Status Valid or Invalid QoS The QoS link of the System page opens the QoS Basic Settings page This page allows you to configure QoS through following pages QOS Basic Settings on page 7 47 QOS Cl
210. n choose to import Direct routes Static routes P RIP routes and or OSPF routes to BGP 7 157 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual RIP Figure 7 138 RRD RIP Configuration Page RRD RIP Configuration a a Clicking the RIP tab brings up the RRD RIP CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 138 which allows you to re distribute the routes that are learnt through other routing protocols to RIP The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 112 Table 7 112 RRD RIP Configuration Page Parameters RIP Status This parameter enables or disables redistribution for RIP You can use this parameter to choose to import Direct routes Static routes Import OSPF routes and BGP routes to RIP This parameter indicates the route tag in case you configure a manual Route Tag option for the tag type 7 158 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware OSPF Figure 7 139 RRD OSPF Configuration Page RRD OSPF Configuration Note OSPF Module should be enabled to enable route redistribution funtionality in OSPF Clicking the OSPF tab brings up the RRD OSPF CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 139 which allows you to e distribute the routes that are learnt through other routing protocols to OSPF The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 113 Table 7 113 RRD OSPF Configuration Page Parameters OSPF Status This parameter enables or disables redistribution for OSPF 7 159 Superblade
211. n in Table 7 176 Table 7 176 PIM BSR Info Page Parameters Component This parameter specifies the component BSR Address This parameter specifies the BSR address Hash Mask Length This parameter specifies the Hash Mask Length 7 243 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual PIM RP Set Information Figure 7 208 PIM RP Information Page PIM RP Set Information Clicking the RP SET INFO tab brings up the PIM RP INFORMATION page Figure 7 208 which displays PIM RP information The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 177 Table 7 177 PIM RP Information Page Parameters This parameter specifies the group address Candidate RP This parameter specifies the candidate RP Expiry Time This parameter specifies the expiry time in seconds 7 244 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware PIM Route Information Figure 7 209 PIM Route Information Page PIM Route Information Clicking the MROUTE INFO tab brings up the PIM ROUTE INFORMATION page Figure 7 209 which displays PIM route information The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 178 Table 7 178 PIM Route Information Page Parameters Group This parameter specifies the group address Mask This parameter specifies the PIM route mask Interface This parameter specifies the Expiry Time This parameter specifies the expiry time in seconds 7 245 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual DVMRP
212. n mode must be Force Force MAC 7 96 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Port Settings Figure 7 84 LA Port Settings Page LA Port Settings Gi0 1 Ex0 3 Diablo ace iong 2 ose Acie tong EE fib a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Active 2 Clicking the PORT SETTINGS tab ier up the LA PORT SETTINGS page EE 7 84 which configures LA properties at a per port level The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 62 Table 7 62 LA Port Settings Page Parameters Port This parameter specifies the Interface Index This parameter specifies the various port modes such as LACP Manual or Mogg Disable This parameter sets the time within which LACP PDUs must be received on a port to avoid timing out of the Aggregated Link If a Long timeout is Timeout chosen then the ports will time out of the Port Channel in 90 seconds If a Short timeout is chosen then the ports will time out of the Port Channel in 3 seconds 7 97 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 62 LA Port Settings Page Parameters Continued This parameter indicates the current state of the port with respect to Link Aggregation The possible states are Up in Bundle The port is an active member of the port channel Up Individual The port is not a member of any port channel but its EUR SRE Oper Status is Up Standby T
213. n page 7 218 ICMP Statistics on page 7 219 ARP Cache Figure 7 189 ARP Cache Page ARP Cache Clicking the ARP CACHE tab brings up the ARP CACHE page Figure 7 189 which displays ARP entries The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 158 Table 7 158 ARP Cache Page Parameters This parameter specifies the interface from which this ARP entry is learned IP Address This parameter specifies the IP address 7 218 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware ICMP Statistics SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM X2C SMIS Figure 7 190 ICMP Statistics Page Refresh About Support Help Log Out ICMP Statistics Received Message Received Error Receive Destination Unreachable Received Redirect Received Echo Requests Received Echo Replies Receive Source Quenches Transmitted Message Transmitted Error Transmited Destination Unreachable Transmitted Redirect Transmitted Echo Requests Transmitted Echo Replies Transmited Source Quenches ooooooooooosoos Clicking the ICMP STATISTICS tab brings up the ICMP STATISTICS page which displays ICMP statistics information The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 159 ICMP Statistics Page Parameters Parameter Received Message Received Error Receive Destination Unreachable Received Redirect Received Echo Requests Received Echo Replies Receive Source Quenches Transmitted Message Transmitted Error Transmitted De
214. n page 7 73 Protocol Group on page 7 74 Port Protocol on page 7 74 Vlan Port MAC Map on page 7 75 Unicast MAC on page 7 76 Wildcard on page 7 77 Switch Port VLAN on page 7 78 VLAN Basic Settings Figure 7 60 VLAN Basic Settings Page VLAN Basic Settings Note To Shudown GARP Dynamic Vian amp Dynamic Multicast should be disabled Clicking the BASIC SETTINGS tab brings up the VLAN Basic SETTINGS page Figure 7 60 which displays VLAN global configuration information The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 43 7 71 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 43 VLAN Basic Settings Page Parameters Parameter Description Garp System Control This parameter starts or shuts down GARP in the switch a This parameter specifies the Learning Mode Independent Shared Hybrid HE MEJ Meee or VLAN Learning VLAN Version This parameter specifies the VLAN version supported This parameter specifies the largest 4094 valid VLAN ID which this Maimon TANID switch can accept above which all will be discarded Maximum Supported This parameter specifies the maximum number of VLANs that this device VLANs can scale Number of VLANs in the This parameter specifies the active number of VLANs configured in the System device MAC Based on All Ports This parameter enables or disables the per Port MAC based classification Port and Protocol Based on This parameter enables or disables the per P
215. ncy connect the switches daisy chained as shown in Figure 7 47 This chain connectivity helps to maintain stacking in case a single link or switch fails Before connecting switches in stacking make sure stacking is enabled in all switches and that the switch identifier and priorities are all configured properly 7 55 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual There is no other specifical configuration required to add stacked switches If two stacking enabled switches connect through stacking cables they form a stack f NOTE Do not use the same switch ID for multiple switches on the stack Figure 7 47 Switch Diagram Switch 2 Switch 3 7 56 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware The SBM GEM X2C has four LEDs to display the stacking identifier Due to the limited spa ce available for LEDs the stacking identifier is displayed in binary form using these four stacking LEDs Stacking Stacking ID Stacking ID Stacking ID Stacking ID Identifier LED 4 LED3 LED 2 LED 1 1 OFF OFF OFF ON 2 OFF OFF ON OFF 3 OFF OFF ON ON 4 OFF ON OFF OFF 5 OFF ON OFF ON 6 OFF ON ON OFF 7 OFF ON ON ON 8 ON OFF OFF OFF 9 ON OFF OFF ON 10 ON OFF ON OFF 11 ON OFF ON ON 12 ON ON OFF OFF 13 ON ON OFF ON 14 ON ON ON OFF 15 ON ON ON ON 16 OFF OFF OFF OFF r Tor 1 gt NOTE In a stack only one switch can be con
216. nded If using the AOC IBH 002 single port InfiniBand mezzanine card the InfiniBand pass through module MUST be installed in the bottom location C 5 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Notes C 6 Disclaimer The products sold by Supermicro are not intended for and will not be used in life support systems medical equipment nuclear facilities or systems aircraft aircraft devices aircraft emergency communication devices or other critical systems whose failure to perform be reasonably expected to result in significant injury or loss of life or catastrophic property damage Accordingly Supermicro disclaims any and all liability and should buyer use or sell such products for use in such ultra hazardous applications it does so entirely at its own risk Furthermore buyer agrees to fully indemnify defend and hold Supermicro harmless for and against any and all claims demands actions litigation and proceedings of any kind arising out of or related to such ultra hazardous use or sale Superblade Network Modules User s Manual
217. nding port is an edge port This parameter allows you to configure the ports explicitly as point to point Force true as a non point to point port or leave the decision to be made dynamically from the AL or MAC layer This parameter specifies the administrative value of Hello Time for the port 7 89 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 55 CIST Settings Page Parameters Continued Auto Edge Status If set to True the edge port status will be dynamically calculated Restricted TCN This parameter indicates the Restricted TCN status of the port VLAN Mapping Figure 7 78 VLAN Mapping Page Clicking the VLAN MAPPING tab brings up the VLAN MAPPING page Figure 7 78 whose table contains one entry for each instance of MSTP The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 56 Table 7 56 VLAN Mapping Page Parameters MSTP Instance ID This parameter specifies the Instance ID which is the index of the table This parameter specifies the list of VLANs to be unmapped from this instance of the spanning tree Unmap VLAN 7 90 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Port Settings Figure 7 79 Port Settings Page Clicking the PORT SETTINGS tab brings up the PORT SETTINGS page Figure 7 79 which displays the various parameters for port settings The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 57 Table 7 57 Port Settings Page Parameters This parameter specifi
218. ng this feature By enabling this feature you can choose to always compare the MED values of paths from different neighbors for the same prefix for choosing the best path BGP Peer Configuration Figure 7 129 BGP Peer Configuration Page Help About Log Out SWITCH SBM GEM X2C sms BGP Peer Configuration Home gt System Mgmt gt Layer2 Mgmt IP address q ds lhe EBGP Maltihop Enabled gt once Next Hop Automatic DHCP ae Relay Keep Alive Time secs IP Ring Hold Time secs OSPFv3 Remote AS 4 Advertisement Interval secs RR VRRP ADD Reset gt Multicast EBGP Multihop Next Hop Keep Alive Time secs Hold Time secs Remote AS Advertisement Interval secs Admin Status Status To configure authentication for neighbors use BGP Neighbor Authentication page 7 147 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Clicking the NEIGHBORS tab brings up the BGP PEER CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 129 which allows you to configre BGP Neighbors The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 103 Table 7 103 BGP Peer Configuration Page Parameters Parameter IP Address EBGP MultiHop Next Hop Hold Time Seconds Remote AS Advertisement Interval seconds Keep Alive Time Seconds Description This parameter specifies the IP address of the BGP neighbor By enabling this feature BGP connections can be established between peers which are not direct
219. ngs Page Parameters 7 40 Table 7 25 Event Configuration Page Parameters iese esse ese ee ee ee ee 7 43 Table 7 26 RMON Alarm Configuration Page Parameters esse ese ee 7 44 Table 7 27 Ethernet Statistics Configuration Page Parameters 7 45 Table 7 28 History Control Configuration Page Parameters 7 46 Table 7 29 QOS Basic Settings Page Parameters sesse ese ee ee ee ee 7 48 Table 7 30 QOS Classmap Settings Page Parameters sesse see ee 7 48 Table 7 31 QOS Policymap Settings Page Parameters esse ees ee 7 49 Table 7 32 COSQ Scheduling Algorithm Settings Page Parameters 7 50 Table 7 33 COSQ Weight and Bandwidth Configurations Page ts EAA AR EE EE EER Mere ame een AR N 7 51 Table 7 34 NTP Settings Page Parameters 7 52 Table 7 35 Stack Configuration Page Parameters 7 58 Table 7 36 Stack Details Page Parameters 7 59 Table 7 37 Stack Counter Details Page Parameters iese ese ese ee ee 7 61 Table 7 38 Port Basic Settings Page Parameters 7 66 Table 7 39 Port Monitoring Page Parameters 7 67 Table 7 40 VLAN Traffic Class Mapping Page Parameters 7 68 Table 7 41 Port Control Page Parameters ee 7 69 Table 7 42 Rate Limiting
220. nicast packets Discards This indicates discarded packets QLength This indicates count of packets currently buffered Octets Indicates total octets received NonUnicastPkts Indicates received non unicast packets 6 8 Chapter 6 1 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 6 3 Port Statistics Screen Controls Continued Errors DropEvents TotalRxMulticastPkts RxUndersizePkts RxFragments TxCollisions Total Octets Rx 64 Bytes Rx Pkts 128 255 Bytes Rx Pkts 512 1023 Bytes Rx Pkts Indicates undersize fragment FCS error oversized errors with good FCS packets Indicates events in which packets are dropped due to a lack of resources This includes events where the receiving shared buffer is full and events when a transmission failure is due to a late collision Indicates the total received multicast packets Indicates received packets with a length that is less than the minimum packet size Indicates received packets length 10 63 bytes with an invalid FCS or an alignment error Indicates the total transmitted collision packets Indicates total number of octets of data received excluding framing bits but including FCS bytes Indicates received packets with a packet length that is less than or equal to 64 bytes Indicates received packets with a packet length that is between includes 128 255 bytes Indicates received packets with a packet length that is between includes
221. nk allows you to perform IPV6 related configurations This can be accomplished through the following six pages IPv6 Route Configuration on page 7 113 IPv6 Interface on page 7 114 ND Cache on page 7 115 Address Settings on page 7 116 Address Profile on page 7 117 Prefix Settings on page 7 118 IPv6 Route Configuration Figure 7 99 IP6 Route Configuration Page tings Address Prot ref IP6 Route Configuration Clicking the IPv6 ROUTE tab brings up the IP6 ROUTE CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 99 which configures various IP6 Route parameters The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 74 Table 7 74 IP6 Route Configuration Page Parameters rer This parameter specifies the network address for which the IPv6 route is Destination Network being added 7 113 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 74 IP6 Route Configuration Page Parameters Continued Routing Protocol This parameter indicates the routing protocol through which the route was 9 learnt if not manual This cannot be configured This parameter indicates the outgoing interface IPv6 Interface Figure 7 100 IPv6 Interface Settings Page IPv6 Interface Settings down don Disabled Je De fa hoo Enabled Miss feo fr Clicking the IPv6 INTERFACE tab brings up the IPv6 INTERFACE SETTINGS page Figure 7 100 which displays the various parameters for the IPv6 Interface The parameters for this page a
222. ns Throughput Latency Switching mode MAC address learning table size MAC address learning Jumbo frame support Flow control Broadcast Storm Control Ingress rate control Port mirroring Trunking Static Link Aggregation IEEE802 1D STP IEEE802 1W RSTP IEEE802 1q VLAN IEEE802 1p QoS IGMP v1 v2 Snooping SNMP agent Http server Features 24Gbps 14 internal 1Gbps 10 external 1Gbps Average 2 65usec frame size 1518 bytes Store and forward 8192 entries IVL Independent VLAN learning Up to 9216 bytes 802 3x pause frame flow control Support per system control types and rates Support per port rate control A copy of ingress and egress data of the monitored port is sent to snooping port Increase bandwidth and redundancy Up to 8 ports per trunk 4 trunks per switch To make a loop free and redundant network using RSTP RSTP is upward compatible with legacy STP Supports 256 VLAN groups Supports 802 1p priority queuing and 4 priority queues per port Prevents unnecessary forwarding of multicast packets to reduce multicast traffic Supports SNMP v1 and v2c Forwarding Superblade Network Modules User s Manual To configure the switch select the switch you want in the SWITCH STATUS screen in the Web based Management Utility See the Web based Management Utility User s Manual for details A SWITCH STATUS screen will appear Figure 6 1 in your browser Figure 6 1
223. nual LA Port Statistics Figure 7 184 LA Port Statistics Page Refresh Support Help About Log Out SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM X2C su Home LA Port Statistics gt System Mgmt gt Layer2 Mgmt N gt Layers Mgmt Gi0 1 Ex0 3 gt Multicast Bads PDUs PDUs Response PDUs PDUs PDUs POUs Response EE Gill 0 o 0 o o o o me Gon 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 AGENTX 603 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RSTP Go o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 che Gols 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RE G06 o 0 0 o o o 0 o Ine GOT o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RIPng cos o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 oserv3 Goo o 0 0 0 0 0 o You Snooping GOO 0 0 0 o 0 o 0 0 Ed Gom 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 EE Gon o 0 0 0 0 o o 0 Gon 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Gold o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 Gos o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Govi o 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 Ex0 1 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E02 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EX03 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Clicking the PORT LACP STATS tab brings up the LA PORT STATISTICS page Figure 7 184 which displays LACP port level statistics The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 153 Table 7 153 LA Port Statistics Page Parameters Parameter Port Received PDUs Received Marker PDUs Received Marker Response Received Unknown PDUs Received Illegal PDUs Transmitted PDUs Transmitted Marker PDUs Transmitted Marker Response Description This parameter specifies the port index This parameter specifies the number of LACP PDUs received This parameter specifies the number of Marker PDUs received This parameter specifies the number of Marker response PDUs receive
224. o o o o o o o o o o o Gi07 1500 1000 o o o o o o o o o o 0 GOS 1500 1000 0 o 0 o o o o o o o 0 G09 1500 1000 0 o 0 o o o 0 o 0 o o G0 10 1500 1000 o 0 o o o o o 0 0 o o Gi0 11 1500 1000 o o o o o o o o o o o Gi0 12 1500 1000 o o 0 o o o 0 o o o o Gi0 13 1500 1000 o 0 0 ooie o 0 0 o 0 Gi0 14 1500 1000 0 0 0 o 0 g o 0 0 o o G0 15 1500 1000 o o o o o o o o o o Gi0 16 1500 100 1521892 10907 192 0 0 0 11265643 14468 662 0 0 Ex0 1 16338 10000 0 o o o o o 0 o 0 o o Ex0 2 16338 10000 o 0 o o 0 e o 0 0 o o Clicking the INTERFACE tab brings up the INTERFACE STATISTICS page Figure 7 167 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 135 Table 7 135 Interface Statistics Page Parameters Parameter Index MTU Speed Bits Per Second Received Octets Description This parameter specifies the Port index This parameter specifies the Max Transfer Unit bytes This parameter specifies the port speed in bits per second This parameter specifies the number of bytes received Received Unicast Packets This parameter specifies the number of unicast packets received Received Nunicast Packets This parameter specifies the number of non unicast packets received Received Discards Received Errors This parameter specifies the number of packets discared due to errors This parameter specifies the number of packets received with errors 7 187 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 135 Interf
225. ognize them other numbers can be used Shared Secret This is a 16 character string used by the RADIUS server as a password to identify EAPOL control frames The PORT AUTHENTICATION SETTINGS allows you to enable or disable authentication for individual ports It also displays the results when a port is enabled for authentication Set Status This enables or disables port authentication ENABLE PORT AUTHENTICATION STATUS means a port should be authorized by a RADIUS server to forward traffic No traffic is forwarded if it is unauthorized No authentication process is required for those ports in disabled status traffic can be forwarded normally Show Client MAC This displays the last client in the MAC address who sent out the EAPOL control frame of the port 6 27 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Authorization This displays the authentication status of an enabled port It includes the following status In Progress This indicates that the authentication is still in progress Traffic is not forwarded before authentication is verified Yes indicates the port access is authorized No indicates the port access is not authorized N A means no authentication required 6 12 IGMP Snooping IP multicast is often used to distribute video audio multimedia data over the network The layer 2 switch will flood multicast frames to all of ports of switch which wastes a lot of unnecessary network bandwidth
226. om BGP peers The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 104 Table 7 104 BGP MED Configuration Page Parameters Parameter Description MED ID This parameter specifies the index for this table Remote AS This parameter specifies the AS number from which the route update is received IP Address Prefix eee specifies the IP address prefix for which the update is IP Address Prefix Length This parameter is used to calculate the subnet Intermediate AS This parameter represents the intermediate AS between the BGP peers This parameter can be set for the incoming or the outgoing packets using Decio In and Out values Value This parameter specifies the MED value to be associated with this path learnt Preference This parameter is used to enable disable filtering Status This parameter indicates the status of the entry Local Preference Figure 7 131 BGP Local Preference Configuration Page Help About Log Out SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM X2C BGP Local Preference Configuration Home gt System Mgmt gt Layer2 Mgmt Local Preference ID Layer3 Mgmt AS iP Remote abet IP Address Prefix DHCP Server DHCP Relay IP Address Prefix Length RIP ane EE OSPFV3 Direction In BP vns RRO sect Preference False gt multicast ADD Reset Statistics 7 149 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Clicking the LOCAL PREF tab brings up the BGP LOCAL PREFERENCE CONFIGURATION page
227. omplete A 11 Figure C 1 Step 1 82 cass ese OE EE ment C 1 Figure G 2 Step 9 BA is a Nan eed C 2 ale de ASE TT C 3 ele MA EO dat ali dae tee dad C 4 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Notes List of Tables Table 3 1 SBM GEM 001 Switch Module Address Default Settings 3 7 Table 4 1 SBM IBS 001 InfiniBand Module Interface cccccocccccccnoncccnnnco 4 2 Table 4 2 SBM IBS 001 InfiniBand Module Features 4 2 Table 4 3 SBM IBS Q3618 Q3616 InfiniBand Module Interface 4 3 Table 4 4 SBM IBS Q3618 Q3616 InfiniBand Module Features 4 3 Table 4 5 SBM IBS Q361M InfiniBand Module Interface 4 4 Table 4 6 SBM IBS Q3616M InfiniBand Module Features 4 5 Table 5 1 SBM GEM 001 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Module Interface 5 1 Table 5 2 GEM 001 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Module Features 5 2 Table 5 3 SBM GEM 001 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Module Ports 5 2 Table 5 4 SBM GEM X2C 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Module Interface 5 3 Table 5 5 SBM GEM X2C 1 10 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Module Features 5 4 Table 5 6 SBM GEM X2C Ports ees ee sees ee ee ee Re ee Re ee Re ee Re ee ee ee 5 4 Table 5 7 SBM GEM 002 Gigabit Pass through Module Interface 5 6 Table 5 8 SBM GEM 002 Gigabit Ethernet Pass through Module Features 5 6 T
228. onds Forward Delay This parameter specifies the forward delay in seconds RSTP Port Statistics Figure 7 180 RSTP Port Statistics Page Refresh Support Help About Log Out SWITCH SBM GEM X2C suis Home RSTP Port Statistics gt System Mgmt P Layer2 Mgmt Layer3 Mgmt Gi0 1 Ex0 3 gt Multicast Statistics interface ResotStabstes dius TACACS RMON Port Re ransmitted T SNMP ST BPDUs C AGENT BPDUs BPDUS BPOUs AGENT VAN RSTP NSTP la 802 1 La Tys RIP RIPng or SPR RP IGMP Snooping IGMP Pim OVNRP Clicking the PORT STATISTICS tab brings up the RSTP PORT STATISTICS page Figure 7 180 which displays RSTP port level statistics The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 149 Table 7 149 RSTP Port Statistics Page Parameters Parameter Description Port This parameter specifies the port index Received RST BPDUs This parameter specifies the number of RSTP BPDUs received PEL Configuration This parameter specifies the number of config BPDUs received Received TCN DU cect Ad specifies the number of topology changed notifications 7 206 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 149 RSTP Port Statistics Page Parameters Continued Transmitted RST BPDUs Transmitted TCN Received Invalid Configuration BPDUs Protocol Migration Count EdgePort Oper Status This parameter specifies the number of RSTP BPDUs transmitted This parameter speci
229. onfiguration ees ee ee ee Re Re ke ee ke 7 167 IGMP Snooping TIME neioii o ee ee ge cnn 7 168 IGMP Snooping Interface 7 169 IGMP Snooping VLAN Router ee ee ee Re ee ke 7 170 IGMP MAC Forwarding ees see ee ee ee Re ee Re RR Re ee ee 7 171 Dynamic Multicasti iss ES ES ER Ee Ge EE a 7 172 Global Configuration ss ales EG Ee EDE Vee RUE De ie ee eee 7 172 Dynamic Multicast Port Configuration 7 173 IGMP stat ES EE ae oe cas beta EE eee ee 7 174 Basic Settings ni adie eee eae 7 174 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Interface Configuration 7 175 Group Information 2 2 ss Sal ae a ee ee a 7 176 Source Information 7 177 PINE voe A ee EE o en set Na rene 7 178 Basic Settings EO AR ER EE rates 7 178 Component OE AR EE tada date ee eens 7 179 WLM ACES LUS Ee e Rs hess ets indien ss EE RA Ee ees 7 180 Candidate RP8 REEL AR o eo Soe ks ES ent aa 7 181 Threshold ss ER EE cats EE Bok Ad oe bee Oe Po ed IE 7 182 Static RP EES EE GEE GE ee a ete 7 183 DV MRP iso cios car AG AS ES er M dt 7 184 DVMRP Basic Settings esse ee eke ee Re ee Re ee ke ee ee ee 7 184 O O 7 185 7 8 StaviStiGS gt eiii etre ee eee ee eta Meo Ve 7 186 Interface tag he Bi aa 7 187 Interface StatistiCS EE aw ehh a 7 187 Ethernet Statistics 422824 use mirent oe ESE RENEE SEGE deetan idea ieie 7 188 alte N EE EE EP ne 7 190 TACACS Statistics ie 7 192 RMON Ethernet Statistics ees ees ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee
230. or No for a single TCP connection If Yes it establishes only a Single Connection single TCP connection with a given TACACS server Secret Key This parameter specifies the encryption key for the given TACACS server 7 19 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual IP Authorized Manager Figure 7 16 IP Authorized Manager Page P Auth Manager IP Authorized Manager Clicking the IP AUTH MANAGER tab brings up the IP AUTHORIZED MANAGER page Figure 7 16 which allows you to configure allowed management nodes for managing the switch The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 7 Table 7 7 IP Authorized Manager Page Parameters This parameter specifies the IP address of the manager An address I AGGIES 0 0 0 0 indicates Any Manager This lists the port through which the manager can access this switch Ports Port List Incoming can be comma separated or provided as a range for example 1 2 3 or 1 3 or 1 2 3 A These control buttons are used to indicate the service type and can be Services Allowed one or more of the following TELNET SSH HTTP HTTPS SNMP or ALL 7 20 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware SSH Configuration Figure 7 17 SSH Configuration SSH Configuration Clicking the SSH tab brings up the SSH CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 17 which allows you to configure the SSH Secure Shell version and keys The parameters for this page are shown
231. ort Protocol based all Ports classification In addition the BASIC SETTINGS page provides the configuration3 of Bridge Mode Customer Provider and the priority for tunneled STP BPDUs When you configure BRIDGE MODE TO PROVIDER the Port Protocol based classification and MAC based classification on all ports must be disabled Port Settings Figure 7 61 VLAN Port Settings Page Refresh Support Help About Log Out SUPERMICRO RENE SWITCH SBM GEM X2C smis ENE SE NE AE AE NES Home VLAN Port Settings System Mgmt File Management Gi0 1 Ex0 3 begs E Port MAC Based F PVID Acceptable Frame Types Ingress 5 Sine Setectan Based VLAN AGENTX Gi0 I Disabled Enabled 11 All Disabled Qos Gi Disabled Enabled 1 All Disabled pue Gi0 3 Disabled Enabled 1 All Disabled Coe es Gi Disabled Enabled 1 All Disabled pes GOS Disabled Enabled 1 All Disabled ren Gi0 6 Disabled Enabled 1 AN Disabled ee Gi Disabled Enabled 1 All Disabled oa GOS Disabled Enabled 1 All Disabled Mei Gi Disabled Enabled 1 Al Disabled Statistics GOO Disabled Enabled 1 All Disabled GN Disabled Enabled 1 All Disabled Gi0 I2 Disabled Enabled All Disabled Gi0 13 Disabled Enabled All Disabled Gi0 14 Disabled Enabled AN Disabled GDS Disabled Enabled Disabled
232. ote that any port may be configured as up active or down inactive All ports are active by default For more detailed information on configuration of the switches see either Chapter 6 1 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware on page 6 1 or Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware on page 7 1 3 4 Chapter 3 Setup and Installation Web based Management Utility IPMI Using the Web based Management Utility or IPMI is the most user friendly method of configuring the switch module You can access the configuration menu either through the management utility or by a network connection See either Chapter 6 or Chapter 7 for more details on the Web based Management Utility Network Connection Use the procedure below to connect and login to the IPMI system Logging In to the IPMI 1 Connect a PC to a network that is accessible to the switch For example connect a PC to any of the front panel ports of the switch and make sure the PC has an IP address on the same subnet as the switch management IP 2 Type the IP address of the switch that you want to connect to in the address bar of your browser and hit lt ENTER gt Once the connection is made the LOGIN screen displays Figure 3 4 Figure 3 4 IPMI Login Screen TT IPMI View 2 6 37 build 071213 Super Micro Computer Inc File Edit Session Manage Help 05032 Ao 9 SUPERMICRO 1 Y PMi Domain a Q amp ER SuperBlade System Name SuperBlad
233. oup Settings Page Parameters Continued Parameter Group Name Storage Type Description Use this parameter to specify the GROUP NAME string Use this parameter to specify whether the STORAGE TYPE is Volatile or Non Volatile SNMP Group Access Settings Figure 7 28 SNMP Group Access Settings Page SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM X2C Home System Mgmt Layer2 Mgmt Layer3 Mgmt gt Multicast Statistics SNMP Group Access Settings Group Name Security Model vi Security Level NoAuthenbcaton Read View Write View Notify View Storage Type Volable Add Reset iso iso iso NonVolatle o iso iso iso NonVolatle Apply Delete Clicking the GROUP ACCESS tab brings up the SNMP GROUP ACCESS SETTINGS page Figure 7 28 which displays the access rights of groups Each entry is indexed by a GROUP NAME a Context Prefix a SECURITY MODEL and a SECURITY LEVEL A proper view name READ WRITE and MODIFY must be used for access control checking It also displays the STORAGE TYPE of the Group Access table An SNMP Group must be created prior to the Group Access configuration The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 18 Table 7 18 SNMP Group Access Settings Page Parameters Parameter Group Name Security Model Description This parameter allows you to specify the GROUP NAME string This parameter allows you to specify whether SNMP version v1 v2 or v3is used
234. out inactive user sessions Session timeout The default value is 5 minutes 600 seconds This displays the current privilege level of the logged in user You can choose to enter another privilege level using this configuration if you have Session Privilege the Enable Password for the required privilege levels The Enable Passwords for different levels are configurable in the Management Security web page 7 30 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware SNMP Figure 7 25 SNMP Agent Control Settings Page SNMP Agent Control Settings Note Either Agent or AgentX_Subagent can be enabled Goto AgentXSubagent configuration page on selecting AgentXSubagent Clicking the SNMP link brings up the SNMP AGENT CONTROL SETTINGS page Figure 7 25 SMIS supports the SNMP Agent or SNMP AgentX Sub agent The SNMP Agent or AgentX Sub agent can be enabled or both can be disabled The SNMP Agent provides the following sub page configurations shown in the table below Table 7 15 SNMP Agent Configuration Pages This page allows you to configure the SNMP community including the COMMUNITY INDEX NAME SECURITY NAME CONTEXT NAME TRANSPORT TAG and STORAGE TYPE SNMP Community Settings on page 7 32 This page allows you to configure access parameters for SNMP groups including GROUP NAME SECURITY MODEL SECURITY LEVEL STORAGE TYPE and READ WRITE and NOTIFY VIEW SNMP Group Access Settings on page 7 34 SNM
235. own below Priority This configures the priority of the current bridge Max Age This configures the maximum age of the current bridge This is the maximum age of spanning tree protocol information learned from the network on any port before it is discarded in units of hundredths of a second This is the actual value that this bridge is currently using Hello Time This indicates the amount of hello time of the current bridge Hello time is the amount of time between the transmission of configuration Bridge PDUs by this node on any port when it is the root of the spanning tree or trying to become so in units of hundredths of a second Forward Delay This indicates the amount of forward delay of the current bridge Forward delay is a time value measured in units of hundredths of a second which controls how fast a port changes its state This value determines how long the port stays in each of the listening and learning states which precede the forward state This value is also used to age all dynamic entries in the forwarding databases when a topology change has been detected and is underway 6 24 Chapter 6 1 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware RSTP Port Settings These settings control and monitor the port based spanning tree status e Participate This specifies if the RSTP is enabled or not for the selected port Cost Displays the cost of this port Cost means the contribution of this port to the path cost o
236. own in Table 7 121 7 170 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 121 IGMP Snooping VLAN Router Ports Page Parameters VANID This parameter specifies the VLAN ID IGMP MAC Forwarding Figure 7 151 MAC Based Multicast Forwarding Table Page MAC Based Multicast Forwarding Table Clicking the GROUP INFORMATION tab brings up the MAC BASED MULTICAST FORWARDING TABLE page Figure 7 151 which displays either the IP Based or the MAC Based Multicast Forwarding Table depending upon the configuration of the forwarding mode The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 122 Table 7 122 MAC Based Multicast Forwarding Table Page Parameters This parameter specifies the VLAN ID pertaining to the MAC based multicast forwarding entry Port List This parameter specifies the learnt ports 7 171 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Dynamic Multicast The Dynamic Multicast link allows you to configure Dynamic Multicast through the following pages Global Configuration on page 7 172 Dynamic Multicast Port Configuration on page 7 173 Global Configuration Figure 7 152 Dynamic Multicast Global Configuration Page Dynamic Multicast Global Configuration Clicking the DYNAMIC MULTICAST tab brings up the DYNAMIC MULTICAST GLOBAL CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 152 which allows you to enable or disable the dynamic multicast feature 7 172 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Swit
237. p group address gives the group prefix 7 181 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Threshold Figure 7 162 PIM Threshold Configuration Page xd PIM Threshold Configuration Clicking the THRESHOLD tab brings up the PIM THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 162 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 131 Table 7 131 PIM Threshold Configuration Page Parameters This parameter is a bits per second BPS value that when it exceeds a Group Threshold certain value initiates source specific counters for a particular group This parameter specifies the time interval that the data rate is monitored Switching Periad for initiating the counters or for switching to SPT This parameter specifies the time interval for which the registered packets RP Switching Period are monitored to initiate switching to SPT 7 182 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Static RP Figure 7 163 Static RP Configuration Page Clicking the STATIC RP tab brings up the STATIC RP CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 163 which configure static PIM RPs Rendezvous Points The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 132 Table 7 132 Static RP Configuration Page Parameters Component ID This parameter specifies a number uniquely identifying the component This parameter represents the multicast group for which the switch Static Group Address advertises itself as the candidate RP
238. packets the Authentication Server will inform the switch whether or not the client is granted access to the LAN through the connected port The client is a workstation that wishes to access the network through a connected switch port All workstations have to run a program supplicant that is compliant with the 802 1x protocol Microsoft Windows XP and Vista should have this A user can also install another third party package such as Odyssey from Funk Software When the GLOBAL RADIUS SETTING and SET STATUS of an individual port are enabled that port will initially be placed into an unauthorized state The client will initiate negotiations by sending an EAPOL START packet There are several EAP authentication methods available in Microsoft Windows XP such as EAP MD5 EAP TLS and EAP PEAP Currently the gigabit switch only supports EAP MDS for 802 1x authentication PEAP MS CHAP v2 uses password based credentials and requires computer certificates on the RADIUS servers EAP TLS uses certificate based credentials and requires user and computer certificates on the wire s client computers and computer certificates on the RADIUS servers EAP MDS Message Digest 5 Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol MD5 CHAP which uses passwords Wiring for 802 1x The EAPOL packets are handled by a management processor in the switch The processor communicates with the outside world through three ports Two ports eth0 and eth
239. pass through module must be installed in a double wide slot in the enclosure in a location alternately used for the InfiniBand switch module The InfiniBand module is discussed in Chapter 4 5 1 SBM GEM 001 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Module The SBM GEM 001 Gigabit Ethernet switch module is a layer 2 Ethernet switch It includes ten 1 Gb s uplink RJ45 ports and fourteen 1 Gb s downlink ports for the SuperBlade s LAN interfaces The Gigabit Ethernet switch module has two internal Ethernet paths to the CMM s The switch is used to provide a connection between the Ethernet controller integrated on the mainboard and an external Ethernet device This is a hot pluggable module See Figure 5 1 Table 5 1 and Table 5 2 for switch details Figure 5 1 SBM GEM 001 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Module ue TE di wees 2 PORT ssh Table 5 1 SBM GEM 001 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Module Interface Item Description A U N RS232 COM Serial Port Initiation OK LED Module Fault LED RJ45 Ethernet Ports 5 1 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 5 1 SBM GEM 001 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Module Interface Continued Ethernet Port Status LEDs Table 5 2 GEM 001 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Module Features Chipset Broadcom BCM5345M Bandwidth 24 Gbps non blocking Jumbo Frame Support Up to 9 kb Protocols Spanning Tree Rapid Spanning Tree Multiple Spanning Tree 802 1d 1w Firmware see Section 3 3
240. perblade Network Modules User s Manual Root Status The settings for ROOT STATUS are shown below Designated Root Bridge The bridge identifier of the root of the spanning tree is determined by the RSTP protocol as executed by this node The bridge identifier value is used as the Root Identifier parameter in all configuration Bridge PDUs originated by this node Max Age This indicates the maximum age of the root bridge This is the maximum age of spanning tree protocol information learned from the network on any port before it is discarded in units of hundredths of a second This is the actual value that this bridge is currently using Hello Time This indicates the amount of hello time of the root bridge Hello time is the amount of time between the transmission of configuration Bridge PDUs by this node on any port when it is the root of the spanning tree or trying to become so in units of hundredths of a second Forward Delay This indicates the amount of forward delay of the root bridge Forward delay is a time value measured in units of hundredths of a second which controls how fast a port changes its state The value determines how long the port stays in each of the listening and learning states which precede the forward state This value is also used to age all dynamic entries in the forwarding databases when a topology change has been detected and is underway Bridge Setting Settings for Bridge Setting are sh
241. ports Remote Management NA Protocols NA Power Consumption 30 6W 5 7 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 5 5 SBM GEP T20 1Gb Ethernet Pass through Module for Twin Blade Modules The SBM GEP T20 Gigabit pass through module is a non configurable pass through module that includes twenty 20 1 Gb s uplink RJ45 ports and twenty 20 1 Gb s downlink ports for the SuperBlade s LAN interfaces This Ethernet module has an internal 12C path to the CMM The pass through module is used to provide a connection between the Ethernet controller integrated on the mainboard and an external Ethernet device Unlike the SBM GEM 001 Gigabit Ethernet switch module this is a pass through module and is not configurable With this module Blade 1 would be connected directly to port 1 Blade 2 to port 2 and so on If you are only connected to 10 blades then ports 11 through 20 are not connected Temperature and voltage of the pass through module are read through the CMM module The LED s of the pass through for a blade are only lit when the blade is on Like the SBM GEM 001 Gigabit Ethernet switch module this pass through module is a hot pluggable module See Figure 5 5 Table 5 11 and Table 5 12 for switch details NOTE The SBM GEP T20 Gigabit pass through module must be connected to another Gigabit Ethernet switch module in order to operate If you connect it to a 10 100 switch it will not work Figure 5 5 SBM GEP T20 Gigabit
242. r from the selected trunk 5 Select one of the distribution criteria for the load balancing algorithm 6 Then click APPLY button to update and save to a new setting 6 14 Chapter 6 1 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware 6 6 Mirroring The switch supports port mirroring A copy of the egress transmit data and the ingress receive data of the mirrored monitored port is sent to the mirroring snooping port A user can attach a monitoring device to the mirroring port such as a sniffer or an RMON probe to view the traffic at the mirrored port This is useful for network monitoring and troubleshooting The switch allows for only one mirrored port at any given time Port mirroring is independent from L2 switching The receive mirrored port still forwards the frame to the mirroring port even if the frame is eventually dropped To configuring port mirroring click on the MIRROR folder in the left hand side bar The MIRROR SETTING screen should appear as in Figure 6 12 Figure 6 12 Port Mirroring Screen SUPERMICR Mirror Setting Mode L2 M 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 os 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 wrelolololololololelolololololololololololololololo elojojojolelelelelelelefefefelelelelelelelelelele Rate L2 Management Spanning Tree Table 6 4 Port Mirroring Screen Controls Control Description Mode This enables or disables mirror
243. r GbE switch 6 31 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Notes Note that ULTF will only drop an internal link from the blade to the switch if all of the external uplinks defined for that blade have failed or been disabled on that switch As long as one or more of uplinks on a particular switch that have been defined for a particular downlink is active the blade and switch will keep the internal link active Figure 6 22 Uplink Failure Tracking Configuration Screen UpLink Failure Tracking ULFT Setting Essie Enable UpLink Failure Tracking Port Statistics Modify Uplink Member PairiD 1 v UplinkPort 1 x VLAN Trunking Mirror QoS Tracking pair Uplink Track Member Downlink Track Member Modify Downlink Member PairiD 1 Downlink Port 13 Rate L2 Management Spanning Tree 802 1x IGMP Snooping Cable Diagnostic Password Logout Pair 10 Table 6 9 Uplink Failure Tracking Configuration Screen Controls Enable UpLink Failure Tracking Enables Disables the UPLINK FAILURE TRACKING feature Select the pair ID and downlink port number to add delete to from downlink member of a pair Modify Downlink Member Downlink Track Member This column defines member ports of a downlink in a ULFT pair Chapter 6 1 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware 6 33 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 6 34
244. r details and support 2 1 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 2 2 General Safety Precautions Follow these rules to ensure general safety e Keep the area around the SuperBlade clean and free of clutter e Place the blade module cover and any system components that have been removed away from the system or on a table so that they won t accidentally be stepped on e While working on the system do not wear loose clothing such as neckties and unbuttoned shirt sleeves which can come into contact with electrical circuits or be pulled into a cooling fan Remove any jewelry or metal objects from your body which are excellent metal conductors that can create short circuits and harm you if they come into contact with printed circuit boards or areas where power is present After accessing the inside of the system replace the blade module s cover before installing it back into the blade enclosure 2 3 Electrostatic Discharge Precautions Electrostatic discharge ESD is generated by two objects with different electrical charges coming into contact with each other An electrical discharge is created to neutralize this difference which can damage electronic components and printed circuit boards The following measures are generally sufficient to neutralize this difference before contact is made to protect your equipment from ESD Use a grounded wrist strap designed to prevent static discharge Keep all components an
245. r number for this switch This identifier should be unique in the stack since the number is used in referring all physical interfaces available in this switch Switen 1D So for example if this parameter is choosen as 2 the physical interfaces will be referred as Gi2 1 Gi2 1 and so on For non stacking stand alone cases this switch ID is considered as zero 7 58 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 35 Stack Configuration Page Parameters Continued This parameter chooses the priority for this switch in the Stacking Master selection It could be configured as Preferred Master Backup Master or Preferred Slave Stack Details Figure 7 49 Stack Details Page Stack Details Clicking the STACK DETAILS tab brings up the STACK DETAILS page Figure 7 49 which displays stacking details The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 36 Table 7 36 Stack Details Page Parameters Self Status Switch ID This parameter is used to specify the switch identifier of this switch Stack MAC This parameter is used to specify the MAC address of this switch This MAC address is used to communicate between stack member switches 7 59 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 36 Stack Details Page Parameters Continued This parameter is used to specify the current status of this switch as Current State Master or Slave Switch ID This parameter is used to specif
246. rameters esse esse 7 19 Table 7 7 IP Authorized Manager Page Parameters 7 20 Table 7 8 SSH Configuration Page Parameters ees esse ese ee ee ee ee ge ee 7 21 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 9 Syslog Configuration Page Parameters 7 24 Table 7 10 Syslog Mail Configuration Page Parameters sees esse ese 7 25 Table 7 11 MAC ACL Configuration Page Parameters 7 26 Table 7 12 IP Standard ACL Configuration Page Parameters sesse ee 7 28 Table 7 13 IP Extended ACL Configuration Page Parameters oooonnncnccnnn 7 29 Table 7 14 Web GUI Settings Page Parameters iese ese ee ee ek 7 30 Table 7 15 SNMP Agent Configuration Pages 7 31 Table 7 16 SNMP Community Settings Page Parameters es esse esse ees 7 32 Table 7 17 SNMP Group Settings Page Parameters 7 33 Table 7 18 SNMP Group Access Settings Page Parameters esse 7 34 Table 7 19 SNMP View Tree Settings Page Parameters 7 36 Table 7 20 SNMP Target Address Settings Page Parameters esse 7 36 Table 7 21 SNMP Target Parameter Settings Page Parameters 7 38 Table 7 22 SNMP Security Settings Page Parameters 7 39 Table 7 23 SNMP Trap Settings Page Parameters esse ese see ese ee ee 7 40 Table 7 24 SNMP AgentX Subagent Setti
247. re shown in Table 7 75 Table 7 75 IPv6 Interface Settings Page Parameters Port This parameter specifies the Index of the VLAN interface Oper This parameter specifies the Operational Status of IPv6 on the given p Interface which is a read only field 7 114 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 75 IPv6 Interface Settings Page Parameters Continued Parameter Description Hop Limit This parameter denotes the Hop Limit value to be placed in the Router P Advertisements sent on the Interface Def Rtr Tim This parameter specifies the Default router lifetime to be placed in the c me Router Advertisements sent on the interface This parameter indicates the Reachable time to be placed in the Router AA res Time Advertisements sent on the interface RA Retrans Time This parameter specifies the RA Retransmit time to be placed in the Router Prefix Adv Status Advertisement sent on the interface This parameter specifies the Prefix Advertisement status on the Interface This parameter specifies the minimum time in seconds allowed between HEIN sending unsolicited router advertisements RA Max This parameter indicates the maximum time in seconds allowed between a sending unsolicited router advertisements a This parameter specifies the maximum number of Duplicate Address DAD Raes Detection retries ND Cache Figure 7 101 ND Cache Configuration Page Help About Log Out SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM
248. represents the allowance and denial of access The values that can be configured are Allow When set to Allow the authentication request is allowed over the set of ports in the PORT LIST Deny When set to Deny the authentication request is NOT allowed over the set of ports in the PORT LIST Permission 7 104 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware MAC Session Info Figure 7 91 MAC Session Info Page MAC Session Info Clicking the MAC SESSION INFO tab brings up the MAC SESSION INFO page Figure 7 21 which configures the supplicant MAC address The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 13 Table 7 67 MAC Session Info Page Parameters This parameter is the initialization control for this Supplicant MAC address Session Intialize Setting this attribute to True causes the Supplicant session with this MAC address to be initialized The attribute value reverts to False once initialization has completed 7 105 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Filters The Filters link allows you to configure Layer 2 packet filtering The Layer 2 packet filtering management has the following configuration pages e Unicast Filters on page 7 106 e Multicast Filters on page 7 107 Unicast Filters Figure 7 92 L2 Unicast Filter Configuration Page L2 Unicast Filter Configuration Clicking the UNICAST FILTERS tab brings up the L2 UNICAST FILTER CONFIGURATION page Figure 7
249. rk topology Topology Change Notification Acknowledge TCA BPDU The major operation of the spanning tree protocol includes a root bridge election finding paths to a root bridge determining the least cost path to root and disabling all other root paths When a RSTP enabled switch is turned on it automatically assumes that it is the root bridge in the spanning tree The software in the switch will elect a switch as the root bridge based on the Bridge ID in the received BPDU The Bridge ID is an 8 byte field which combines a high order two byte bridge priority number and a lower order six byte switch MAC address The switch with the lowest Bridge ID will be elected as the root bridge All RSTP participating switches will use an algorithm to determine how close they are to the root bridge which is known as Path Cost The path with lowest cost will be selected as the active path All others will be blocked standby TCN packets are injected into the network by a non root switch and propagated to the root Upon receipt of the TCN the 6 21 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual root switch will set a Topology Change flag in its normal BPDUs This flag is propagated to all other switches to instruct them to rapidly age out their forwarding table entries Port Transition State When a device is connected to an RTSP or STP enabled switch port for the first time it will not immediately start to forward data Instead it will go t
250. rk Modules User s Manual 7 266 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware 7 267 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 7 268 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware 7 269 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Notes 7 270 Appendix A HCA Mezzanine Cards This appendix describes safety guidelines features and installation of HCA Mezzanine cards used with the InfiniBand and 10 Gb switch module See Chapter 4 for further details on the InfiniBand module See Chapter 5 for further details on the 10 Gb switch module A 1 Safety Guidelines To avoid personal injury and property damage carefully follow all the safety steps listed below when accessing your system or handling the components ESD Safety Guidelines Electric Static Discharge ESD can damage electronic components To prevent damage to your system it is important to handle it very carefully The following measures are generally sufficient to protect your equipment from ESD Use a grounded wrist strap designed to prevent static discharge Touch a grounded metal object before removing a component from the antistatic bag Handle the add on card by its edges only do not touch its components peripheral chips memory modules or gold contacts When handling chips or modules avoid touching their pins Put the card and peripherals back into their antistatic bags when not in use General Safety Guidel
251. rnal downlink member ports is disabled when all of the trunking uplink member ports fail Figure 6 22 shows the UPLINK FAILURE TRACKING CONFIGURATION screen Table 6 9 describes each configuration item For example if your SuperBlade has two blade servers installed on slot 1 and slot 3 then each blade has two LAN ports one connected to the internal port of the upper GbE switch and the other one connected to the internal port of the bottom GbE switch To implement switch redundancy you need to have two GbE switches installed Each of these GbE switches should enable the UpLink Failure Tracking feature and have the exact same proper configuration as shown in Figure 6 22 The pair configuration in this example defines the ULFT for blade 1 and blade 3 The external port 5 of each switch is connected to an external third party switch through an Ethernet cable This assumes that the Network Adapter Teaming or Channel Bonding has a proper configuration and is running on each of the blades If one of the external Ethernet cables is broken or the third party switch port to which the cable connects fails then one of the SuperBlade GbE switches will detect a link drop on its external port 5 and turn down the link on its internal ports 11 and 13 The Teaming or Channel Bonding software running on both of these blades then detects a link drop on one of its LAN ports and switches to another LAN port automatically This allows network traffic to go through anothe
252. rotected workstation secure the card to the serverboard by gently but firmly attaching the card to the two connectors 4 Using a Phillips screw driver secure and tighten each screw one at a time Do not overtighten the screws NOTE The latest models of the Supermicro InfiniBand HCA card have a smaller form factor to make them compatible with newer blade modules The J newer HCAs come from the factory with an extender bracket attached to allow installation in older blade modules For installation in newer blade modules first remove the extender bracket by removing the two screws with a Phillips screwdriver Then follow the above instructions for installation on the blade module itself A 10 Figure A 9 Card Installation Figure A 10 Installation Complete A 11 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Notes A 12 Appendix B LED Descriptions This appendix covers LED descriptions for the blade enclosure and other module components The LED descriptions for the InfiniBand switch Gigabit Ethernet modules and Blade modules are included here for your reference B 1 Gigabit Ethernet Module LED Descriptions SBM GEM 001 Gigabit Ethernet module and SBM GEM 002 Pass through module LEDs are described below in Table B 1 Table B 1 Gigabit Ethernet Switch LED Indicators LED State Description Module Initiation OK LED The GEM 001 GbE switch module is operational and has GEM 001 Module Stea
253. rt It indicates whether a port is considered to have a point to point connection or shared media 7 92 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 58 MSTP CIST Port Status Page Parameters Continued Parameter Role Port State Description This parameter specifies the ports current role as defined by the Spanning Tree Protocol This parameter specifies the port s current state as defined by the application of the Spanning Tree Protocol 7 93 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual LA The LA link provides links to the following configuration pages LA Basic Settings on page 7 94 Interface Settings on page 7 95 Port Channel on page 7 96 Port Settings on page 7 97 Port State Info on page 7 98 Load Balancing on page 7 99 LA Basic Settings Figure 7 81 LA Basic Settings Page Clicking the BASIC SETTINGS tab brings up the LA BASIC SETTINGS page Figure 7 81 which displays the various parameters for LA basic settings The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 59 Table 7 59 LA Basic Settings Page Parameters System Control This parameter Starts or Shutsdown LA in the switch 7 94 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 59 LA Basic Settings Page Parameters Continued System Priority pe ad specifies the priority value associated with the Actor s Interface Settings Figure 7 82 Port Channel Interface
254. rt Status Page Parameters Designated Root This parameter specifies the unique Bridge Identifier of the bridge that is 9 recorded as the root for the segment to which the port is attached This parameter specifies the Bridge Identifier of the bridge which this port Designated Bridge considers to be the Designated Bridge for this port s segment 7 85 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 53 RSTP Port Status Page Parameters Continued This parameter specifies the operational point to point status of the LAN Type segment attached to this port It indicates whether a port is considered to have a Point to point connection or Shared Media This parameter specifies the port s current state as defined by application Port State of the Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP The MSTP link leads you to the following configuration pages e MSTP Basic Settings on page 7 86 MSTP Timers on page 7 88 e Port Configuration on page 7 89 e VLAN Mapping on page 7 90 e Port Settings on page 7 91 e CIST Port Status on page 7 92 MSTP Basic Settings Figure 7 75 Global Configuration Page egion Nam egon Path MS ede rity Vers T n Ve on R Enabled i Ms se MSTP 003048000003 Jo False gt Note To enable MSTP Functionality RSTP should be disabled and shutdown 7 86 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Clicking the BASIC SETTINGS tab brings up the GLOBAL CONFIGURA
255. rt Tag Storage Type gt Multicast gt Statistics Apply Delete Clicking the COMMUNITY tab brings up the SNMP COMMUNITY SETTINGS page Figure 7 26 which allows you to add SNMP managers or remove existing managers The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 16 Table 7 16 SNMP Community Settings Page Parameters Parameter Description Community index This parameter sets the COMMUNITY INDEX identifer Community name This parameter sets the COMMUNITY NAME string Security Name This parameter sets the User Name String 7 32 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 16 SNMP Community Settings Page Parameters Continued Transport Tag This parameter sets the TRANSPORT TAG Identifer SNMP Group Settings Figure 7 27 SNMP Group Settings Page NonVotsie SHA mat NowWolane gt osse Clicking the GROUP tab brings up the SNMP GROUP SETTINGS page Figure 7 27 This page helps you map a combination of the SECURITY MODEL and the SECURITY NAME into a GROUP NAME which is used to define an access control policy In addition this page displays the STORAGE TYPE of the Group Table The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 17 Table 7 17 SNMP Group Settings Page Parameters Security Model This parameter allows you to select from version 1 version 2 or version 3 y for the SECURITY MODEL used 7 33 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 17 SNMP Gr
256. rt number is top port second port number is bottom port QDR Switch Reset and CMM Load Default KVM Connector CMM Activity LED a If the fault LED goes on the QDR switch operation is stopped It then needs a hardware reset or a power off cycle to bring it back into normal operation b Ifthe Green LED is blinking the QDR switch is overheated Please check the air fan and vent condition If the fault LED goes on at the same time a hard reset or a power off cycle needs to be initiated 4 4 Chapter 4 InfiniBand Modules Table 4 6 SBM IBS Q3616M InfiniBand Module Features Feature Internal External Ports Bandwidth Latency Power Consumption Operating System Description Internal 20 4X QDR copper ports External 16 4X QDR copper ports 4X QDR 40 Gbps non blocking architecture for 2 88 Tbps total bandwidth 36 port 120 ns port to port switch latency 120W with CMM Module Loaded Firmware upgradable In addition to the InfiniBand switching capability it shares with other Supermicro Blade InfiniBand switches the SBM IBS Q3616M module includes provision for the installation of an optional integrated Chassis Management Module CMM This mini CMM BMB CMM 002 is installed as an add on module inside the switch chassis This allows installation of two redundant switches in the SuperBlade enclosure without the loss of system management capability Note that a dual port InfiniBand ad
257. rts of the same switch are connected together Disabled Not a strictly part of RSTP a network administrator can manually disable a port To configure the RAPID SPANNING TREE click the SPANNING TREE folder on the left hand side bar There are two portions to configure RSTP SWITCH SETTINGS and RSTP PORT SETTINGS as shown in the RAPID SPANNING TREE screen Figure 6 18 6 22 Chapter 6 1 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Figure 6 18 Rapid Spanning Tree Screen SUPERMICR Rapid Spanning Tree System RSTP Switch Settings Port ee 7 Enable RSTP Statistics VLAN Designated Root Bridge Trunking Priority 0 61440 Mirror Max Age 6 40 sec Qos Hello Time 1 10 sec Rate Forward Delay 4 30 sec L2 Management Note 2 Hello Time 1 lt Max Age lt 2 Forward Delay 1 802 1 Apply Global Settings IGMP Snoopin RSTP Port Settings Edit Cable Diagnostic Port Participate Cost Priority Edge UpLink Failure Track Password Logout The RSTP SWITCH SETTINGS allows the user to control RSTP parameters from the bridge point of view ROOT STATUS shows status of the root bridge BRIDGE SETTING shows the current bridge setup To turn on the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP check on the ENABLE RSTP dialog box and click on the APPLY GLOBAL SETTINGS button 6 23 Su
258. s This parameter displays the VLAN Port Number which can be selected by VEAN ROMENO the check box to the left of the column 7 78 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Dynamic Vlan The Dynamic VLAN link allows you to configure the Dynamic VLAN information Dynamic VLAN configuration information has been provided in the following pages Dynamic VLAN Global Configuration on page 7 79 Port Configuration on page 7 80 GARP Timers on page 7 81 Dynamic VLAN Global Configuration Figure 7 68 Dynamic VLAN Global Configuration Page Dynamic Vian Global Configuration Clicking the DYNAMIC VLAN tab brings up the DYNAMIC VLAN GLOBAL CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 68 which allows you to enable or disable Dynamic VLAN 7 79 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Port Configuration Figure 7 69 Dynamic VLAN Port Configuration Page Dynamic Vian Port Configuration Gi0 1 Ex0 3 LEUR eee eee d d d d d it qi Clicking the PORT SETTINGS link brings up the DYNAMIC VLAN PORT CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 69 which allows you to configure parameters for Dynamic VLAN ports The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 48 Table 7 48 Dynamic VLAN Port Configuration Page Parameters This parameter displays the Port Number which can be selected by the check box to the left of the column Restricted VLAN This parameter allows you to enable disable REST
259. s 12 meters It is acceptable to use a 1 meter stacking cable for port 1 and a 12 meter uplink cable for port 2 You will only need to configure the long cable preference for port 2 Do this by selecting the Port Number in the CX4 CABLE LENGTH screen Figure 7 46 and then selecting the long option Figure 7 46 Configuring CX4 Cable Length CX4 Cable Length Settings Short Default 03 Short Default M Short Default Y Note For cables of 1M to 7M length use default short option For cables longer than 7M and up to 12M use long option This configuration is done on an individual port basis Thus you can use short for one port and long for the other port Alternatively you might use both short or if neither are for stacking both can be long cables 7 54 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Enabling Stacking By default Supermicro switches act as stand alone switches This stand alone default facilitates using 10G Ethernet ports as Extreme Ethernet ports for uplinks When stacking is enabled the stacking ports are dedicated for stacking purposes Stacking can be enabled using the command stack with the switch identifier and priority The detailed command syntax is explained below f NOTE When stacking is enabled the switch needs to be rebooted to make it effective r NOTE When a switch is acting as a stand alone switch with stacking disabled V4 all physical interfaces are numbered as 0
260. s Ethernet module has two internal Ethernet paths to the CMM s The switch is used to provide a connection between the Ethernet controller integrated on the mainboard and an external Ethernet device Unlike the SBM GEM 001 Gigabit Ethernet switch module this is a pass through module and is not configurable With this module Blade 1 would be connected directly to port 1 Blade 2 to port 2 and so on If you are only connected to 10 blades then ports 11 through 14 are not connected Temperature and voltage of the pass through module are read through the CMM module The LED s of the pass through for a blade are only lit when the blade is on Like the SBM GEM 001 Gigabit Ethernet switch module this pass through module is a hot pluggable module See Figure 5 3 Table 5 7 and Table 5 8 for switch details NOTE The SBM GEM 002 Gigabit pass through module must be connected to another Gigabit Ethernet switch module in order to operate If you connect it to a 10 100 switch it will not work Figure 5 3 SBM GEM 002 Gigabit Pass through Module FESSES sess 1 n 7 5 3 ie die i oT Ga lie 141210864 en SR JO A SEL 5 5 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 5 7 SBM GEM 002 Gigabit Pass through Module Interface Item Description 1 Module Release Handle 2 RJ45 Ethernet Ports 3 Ethernet Port Status LEDs Table 5 8 SBM GEM 002 Gigabit Ethernet Pass through Module Features Feature Internal E
261. s Page Parameters Parameter Description Received MST BPDUS This parameter specifies the number of MSTP BPDUS received Received RST BPDUs This parameter specifies the number of RSTP BPDUs received Received Config BPDUs This parameter specifies the number of config BPDUs received This parameter specifies the number of topology change notification Received TCN BPDUs BPDUs received 7 209 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 151 MSTP CIST Port Statistics Page Parameters Continued Parameter Transmitted MST BPDUs Transmitted RST BPDUs Transmitted Config BPDUs Transmitted TCN BPDUs Received Invalid MST BPDUs Received Invalid RST BPDUs Received Invalid Config BPDUs Received Invalid TCN BPDUs Protocol Migration Count Description This parameter specifies the number of MSTP BPDUs transmitted This parameter specifies the number of RSTP BPDUs transmitted This parameter specifies the number of config BPDUs transmitted This parameter specifies the number of topology change notification BPDUs transmitted This parameter specifies the number of invalid MSTP BPDUs received This parameter specifies the number of invalid RSTP BPDUs received This parameter specifies the number of invalid config BPDUs received This parameter specifies the number of invalid TCN BPDUs received This parameter specifies the number of times protocol migration happened MSTP MSTI Port Statis
262. s displayed on the left navigation pane on all configuration pages This makes it easier for you to choose any configuration page directly without going back to the home page every time To go to one of a MANAGEMENT page s sub pages click on the gt symbol to expand the list Middle Configuration Link Table This section of the page displays a table of links to all major configurations This table provides links similar to the Left Side Tree links The configuration links are categorized based on features of the switch 7 4 System Management Page Figure 7 6 System Management Page Welcome to the System Management Page The various System features of the can be configured through the links available in this page System Settings e system parameters File Management copy or delete or save and restore configuration file Firmware Uj upgrade switch firmware Management Security configure user accounts RADIUS TACACS SSH andSSL Syslog configure syslog parameters ACL configure access control ist Web Settings configure WEB GUI settings OU gees SNMP configure SNMP AGENT or AGENTX parameters ra RMON M configure RMON parameters The SYSTEM MANAGEMENT page Figure 7 6 contains the following links System Settings on page 7 9 System Version on page 7 11 File Management on page 7 12 e Firmware Upgrade on page 7 14 e Management Security on page 7 15 e Syslog on page 7 24 ACL
263. s that can be stored in the link state database Area Figure 7 117 OSPF Area Configuration Page Refresh Support Help About Log Out SWITCH SBM GEM X2C sus CCSN EN ENE NEE NEE OSPF Area Configuration Home gt System Mgmt gt Layer2 Mgmt Area ID v Layera Mgmt Tyre Normal ts Send Summary Routes DHCP Server Metric ve Relay Metric Ts RIPng Ep GSPF Type Of Service osPFva BGP Translator Role candidate RAS NSSA Translator Stability Interval 40 gt multicast ADD Reset Statistics o 0000 Normal Send Summary Routes Stub Metric Stub Metric Type Translator Role Stability Interval candidate 40 Apply Delete Clicking the AREA tab brings up the OSPF AREA CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 117 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 91 Table 7 91 OSPF Area Configuration Page Parameters Parameter Area ID Type Send Summary Router Default Cost Description This parameter specifies the identifier for the area This parameter allows you to configure the area type as a Stub area a Normal area or NSSA This field is used to control the import of summary LSAs to stub areas This does not have any impact for other areas This parameter specifies the metric cost associated with the routes 7 132 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Interface Figure 7 118 OSPF Interface Configuration Page Neighbor RRDR
264. s the index of the event to be raised when the RisING THRESHOLD is Rising Event Index reached 7 44 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 26 RMON Alarm Configuration Page Parameters Continued Owner Specifies the owner of the alarm Ethernet Statistics Configuration Figure 7 38 Ethernet Statistics Configuration Page Ethernet Statistics Configuration Clicking the ETHERNET STATISTICS tab brings up the ETHERNET STATISTICS CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 38 which configures RMON Ethernet statistics parameters The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 27 Table 7 27 Ethernet Statistics Configuration Page Parameters Index This parameter specifies the index to the table This parameter specifies the total number of octets received from the Octets network This parameter specifies the total number of broadcast packets received Broadcast Packets from the network 7 45 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 27 Ethernet Statistics Configuration Page Parameters Continued Parameter Description This parameter specifies the total number of multicast packets received Multicast Packets ton LE MCE Owner This parameter specifies the owner string History Control Configuration Figure 7 39 History Control Configuration Page Help About Log Out SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM X2C sus e a ie EN Ho
265. s up the VLAN PORT STATISTICS page Figure 7 174 which displays the various parameters XXXXXX The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 143 Table 7 143 VLAN Port Statistics Page Parameters Parameter Description Port This parameter specifies the port index VLAN ID This parameter specifies the VLAN identifer Received Frames Transmitted Frames Received Discards Received Overflow Transmitted Overflow Transmitted Overflow Discards This parameter specifies the number of packets received in this VLAN This parameter specifies the number of packets transmitted in this VLAN This parameter specifies the number of received packets discarded This parameter specifies the number of received overflow packets This parameter specifies the number of transmit overflows This parameter specifies the number of transmit overflow discards 7 200 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware VLAN Multicast Table Figure 7 175 VLAN Multicast Table Page astTable unt i VLAN Multicast Table Clicking the MULTICAST TABLE tab brings up the VLAN MULTICAST TABLE page Figure 7 175 which displays multicast VLAN information The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 144 Table 7 144 VLAN Multicast Table Page Parameters This parameter specifies the VLAN identifer Egress Ports This parameter specifies the indexes of egress ports 7 201 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual VL
266. saved in the switch 7 73 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Protocol Group Figure 7 63 VLAN Protocol Group Settings Page PortProt VLAN Protocol Group Settings Clicking the PROTOCOL GROUP tab brings up the VLAN PROTOCOL GROUP SETTINGS page Figure 7 63 which is used to map Protocol Templates to Protocol Group Identifiers The FRAME TYPE gives you the data link encapsulation format The PROTOCOL VALUE is the value of the protocol in a protocol template The GROUP ID represents a group of protocols that are associated together Port Protocol Clicking the Port PROTOCOL tab brings up the PORT VLAN PROTOCOL SETTINGS page not shown which displays a table used for Port and Protocol based VLAN classification The GROUP ID designates a group of protocols in the Protocol Group Database The VLAN ID is the ID associated with a group of protocols for each port 7 74 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Vian Port MAC Map Figure 7 64 VLAN Port MAC Map Settings Page VLAN Port mac Map Clicking the PORT MAC MAP tab brings up the VLAN Port MAC Map page Figure 7 64 which allows you to configure MAC based VLANs The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 44 Table 7 44 VLAN Port MAC Map Page Parameters This displays the port number Port Mac Map Vid This parameter specifies the VLAN identifier for this MAC based VLAN 7 75 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual
267. se CA 95131 U S A 1 408 503 8000 1 408 503 8008 marketing supermicro com General Information support supermicro com Technical Support www supermicro com Super Micro Computer B V Het Sterrenbeeld 28 5215 ML s Hertogenbosch The Netherlands 31 0 73 6400390 31 0 73 6416525 sales supermicro nl General Information support supermicro nl Technical Support rma supermicro nl Customer Support Super Micro Computer Inc 4F No 232 1 Liancheng Rd Chung Ho 235 Taipei County Taiwan R O C 886 2 8226 3990 886 2 8226 3991 www supermicro com tw support supermicro com tw 886 2 8228 1366 ext 132 or 139 Chapter 2 System Safety System safety precautions and information is included in this chapter Please review this information before installing or using your Supermicro equipment 2 1 Electrical Safety Precautions Basic electrical safety precautions should be followed to protect yourself from harm and the SuperBlade from damage Be aware of how to power on off the enclosure power supplies and the individual blades as well as the room s emergency power off switch disconnection switch or electrical outlet If an electrical accident occurs you can then quickly remove power from the system Do not work alone when working with high voltage components Power should always be disconnected from the blade module when removing or installing such system components as the mainboard m
268. server 8 If the switch does not come up after the firmware upgrade due to any incorrect firmware images boot the switch using a fallback firmware image Refer the steps in the procedure Booting using a Fallback Firmware Image below to boot the switch using a fallback firmware image 9 Once the switch is booted with a fallback firmware repeat the above steps to upgrade with the correct firmware image 10 On successful upgrade of the latest firmware it is advised that you upgrade the fallback firmware image also Follow the steps listed in the procedure Upgrading Fallback Firmware using TFTP below to upgrade the fallback firmware image 3 9 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Booting using a Fallback Firmware Image Use the procedure below to boot using a fallback firmware image 1 Reboot the switch by power cycling the switch power 2 During reboot press any key when it displays the below text as shown in Hit any key to stop autoboot 5 Figure 3 7 Displayed Text for Rebooting Hit any key to stop autoboot 5 3 10 Chapter 3 Setup and Installation switch you are using V4 NOTE The numbers in the Product Type entry change depending upon the r 3 AD OU Rm Once the boot seguence is interrupted it will display menu options as shown in Figure 3 7 Use the H option to set hardware information by typing the character H This will display the hardware information that can
269. specifies the Admin Status of the Virtual Router 7 165 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual 7 7 Multicast Figure 7 146 Multicast Home Page Welcome to the Multicast Page The various Multicast features of the Supermicro switch can be configured through the links available in this page IGMP Snooping configure IGS status y Dynamic multicast ie configure dynamic multicast IGMP L4 configure IGMP status eo PM configure interfaces associated with PIM DVMRP configure global DVMRP status MULTICAST HOME page Figure 7 146 has links to multicast features in the switch GMP Snooping The GMP Snooping link allows you to configure GMP Snooping through the following pages e IGMP Snooping Configuration on page 7 167 IGMP Snooping Timer on page 7 168 IGMP Snooping Interface on page 7 169 IGMP Snooping VLAN Router on page 7 170 IGMP MAC Forwarding on page 7 171 7 166 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware IGMP Snooping Configuration Figure 7 147 IGMP Snooping Configuration Page IGMP Snooping Configuration Enabled J Mac Based RouerPons M2 Enabled Note To enable IGS Dynamic Multiast staus should be disabled Clicking the BASIC SETTINGS tab brings up the IGMP SNOOPING CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 147 which allows you to configure IGMP snooping parameters The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 118 Table 7 118 IGMP Snooping Confi
270. st group will not be forwarded The default value is 5 seconds Report Forward Interval Secs IGMP Snooping Interface Figure 7 149 IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration Page MP Snooping Interface Configuration Clicking the INTERFACE CONFIGURATION tab brings up the IGMP SNOOPING INTERFACE CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 149 which configures IGMP snooping interface specific parameters The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 120 Table 7 120 IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration Page Parameters VLAN ID This parameter specifies the VLAN ID for which the configuration is to be performed This parameter specifies the operating version of the IGMP snooping switch for a specific VLAN Operating Version 7 169 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 120 IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration Page Parameters Continued This parameter specifies whether the IGMP snooping switch is enabled or Querier Status disabled as a querier for a specific VLAN Router Port List This parameter specifies the router port list for a specific VLAN Current Querier Status This parameter specifies the current status of the Querier IGMP Snooping VLAN Router Figure 7 150 IGMP Snooping VLAN Router Ports Page RouterPorts IGMP Snooping VLAN Router Ports Clicking the ROUTE PORTS tab brings up the IGMP SNOOPING VLAN ROUTER PORTS page Figure 7 150 The parameters for this page are sh
271. stination Unreachable Transmitted Redirect Description This parameter specifies the number of received messages This parameter specifies the number of received errors This parameter specifies the number of received destination unreachables This parameter specifies the number of received redirects This parameter specifies the number of echo requests This parameter specifies the number of echo replies This parameter specifies the number of source quenches This parameter specifies the number of transmited messages This parameter specifies the number of transmitted errors This parameter specifies the number of transmitted destination unreachables This parameter specifies the number of transmitted redirects 7 219 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 159 ICMP Statistics Page Parameters Continued Transmitted Echo Replies This parameter specifies the number of transmitted echo replies 7 220 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware IPv6 The IPv6 link allows you to view IPv6 statistics through the following pages IP V6 Interface Statistics on page 7 221 ICMP V6 Statistics on page 7 223 IP V6 Interface Statistics Figure 7 191 IPV6 Interface Statistics Page IPV6 Interface Statistics Clicking the IPV6 INTERFACE tab brings up the IPV6 INTERFACE STATISTICS page Figure 7 191 which displays IPv6 port statistics The parameters for this page are sho
272. t Multicast Statistics Port Control Gi0 1 Ex0 3 il gt Enabled G2 Auto a Disabled Enabled G3 Auto gt Disabled Enabled Gi0 4 Auto E Disabled Enabled GS Auto Disabled Enabled Gi0 6 Auto Disabled Enabled GOT Auto gt Disabled Enabled GDS Auto 3 Disabled Enabled G09 Auto a Disabled Enabled Gi0 10 Auto id Disabled Enabled Gi0 11 Auto e Disabled Enabled GO Autio Disabled Enabled Gi0 13 Auto Disabled Enabled Gi0 14 Auto Disabled Enabled Gi0 15 Auto Disabled Enabled Gi0 16 Auto Disabled Enabled Ex0 1 Auto Disabled Enabled ExO2 Auto Disabled Enabled Ex03 Auto Disabled Enabled Anniv Clicking the PORT CONTROL tab brings up the PORT CONTROL page Figure 7 58 which allows you to configure specific parameters of the port You can choose between Auto negotiation and No negotiation for a port If No negotiation is chosen then the speed of the link FlowControl and duplex modes can be configured The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 41 Table 7 41 Port Control Page Parameters Parameter Port Mode Duplex Speed Flow Control Admin Status Flow Control Operation Status HOL Block Prevention Description This displays the port number This parameter allows you to select either Auto Negotiation or No negotiation This parameter allows you to select either Full Duplex or Half Duplex This
273. ter This parameter specifies the number of transitions as Master Advertisment Internal Error This parameter specifies the number of advertisement errors happened IP TTL Errors This parameter specifies the number of IP TTL errors happened 7 234 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 169 VRRP Statistics Page Parameters Continued Priority Zero Packet a sel ae Transmited This parameter specifies the number of priority zero packets transmitted Address List Errors This parameter specifies the number of address list errors Authentication Type This parameter specifies the number of authentication type mismatch Mismatch received 7 235 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual IGMP Snooping The IGMP link allows you to view IGMP statistics through the following pages IGMP Snooping Clear Statistics on page 7 236 IGMP Snooping V1 V2 Statistics on page 7 237 IGMP Snooping V3 Statistics on page 7 238 IGMP Snooping Clear Statistics Figure 7 201 IGMP Snooping Clear Statistics Page IGMP Snooping Clear Statistics Clicking the IGS CLEAR STATS tab brings up the IGMP SNOOPING CLEAR STATISTICS page Figure 7 201 which displays clearing IGMP snooping statistics The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 170 Table 7 170 IGMP Snooping Clear Statistics Page Parameters This parameter gives you the option to clear all the IGMP statistics
274. tgoing traffic This parameter specifies the initialization control for the port Setting this value to True causes the port to be initialized The value reverts to False once initialization is complete This parameter provides configuration to enable or disable the reauthentication mechanism on the port 7 102 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Timers Figure 7 89 802 1x Timer Configuration Page Refresh Support Help About Log Out SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM X2C sus RSR NT TT Home 802 1x Timer Configuration System Mgmt System Settings File Management Gi0 1 Ex0 3 Firmware Upgrade Management Security xa Web Settings SNMP AGENTX GO 60 30 3600 30 30 3 Qos G02 60 30 3600 30 30 3 Stack G03 60 30 3600 30 30 3 Layer2 Mgmt is EE ee G04 60 EJ 3600 30 30 3 Port Manager Gios 60 30 3600 30 30 3 mamie VLAN 4 Er G06 60 30 3600 30 30 3 PE G07 60 20 3600 30 30 3 802 1 a Gos 60 30 3600 30 30 3 hayes Mgmt G09 60 30 3600 30 30 3 ticast gt Statistics Gi0 10 60 30 3600 30 30 3 Gi0 11 60 30 3600 30 30 3 Gi0 12 60 30 3600 30 30 3 G13 60 30 3600 30 30 3 Gi0 14 60 30 3600 30 30 3 GIS 60 30 3600 30 30 3 GO6 60 30 3600 30 30 3 Ex0 1 60 30 3600 30 30 3 Ex02 60 3 3600 30 30 3 Ex03 60 30 3600 30 30 3 Clicking the TIMERS tab brings up the 802 1X TIMER CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 89 which configures Timer parameters at the individual port level The parameters for this page are s
275. that is a member of same VLAN The ingress untagged frames are tagged by a per port default tag PVID The forwarding decision is based on this assigned default PVID If the ingress frames are 802 1Q tagged the port won t alter the frames but will keep the frame s VLAN information intact Tagged frames are forwarded according to a VID contained within the tag The switch also supports ingress filtering The switch will examine the VLAN information in the incoming packets header to determine whether to drop or forward the packets If the incoming frame has tagged VLAN information the ingress port will check itself to see if it is a member of the tagged VLAN If it is not the frame will be dropped If it s a member of the tagged VLAN then it will check the destination port to see if it is a member of the tagged VLAN If not the frame is dropped If the destination is a member 6 10 Chapter 6 1 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware of the VLAN the frame is forwarded to the destination port If the incoming frame is not tagged with VLAN information the ingress port will use PVID as the VLAN ID If the destination port is not in the same VLAN the frame is dropped The switch is initially configured to have one VLAN and its VID is 1 This VLAN is called the default VLAN By default all ports are initially assigned to the default VLAN Frames can not be forwarded across VLANs Frames whether they are unicast multicast or broadcast cannot f
276. the COMPONENT tab brings up the PIM COMPONENT CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 159 The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 128 Table 7 128 PIM Component Configuration Page Parameters Component ID This parameter specifies a number uniquely identifying the component Mode This parameter specifies the mode of the component It can be Sparse or Dense 7 179 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 128 PIM Component Configuration Page Parameters Continued Parameter BSR Address BSR Expiry Time Description This parameter specifies the IP address of the bootstrap router for the local PIM region which is a read only field This parameter indicates the minimum time remaining before the bootstrap router in the local domain is declared down which is a read only field Interfaces Figure 7 160 PIM Interface Configuration Page Refresh Support Help About Log Out SWITCH SBM GEM X2C sus MEC EEN ENE N EE PIM Interface Configuration Home gt System Mgmt gt Layer2 Mgmt Interface viani Layer3 Mgmt IPV4 SRE Address Type IPV4 IGMP Snoopin nam Mica Cm U icmp DR Priority 1 DVMRE Hello Hold Time 105 gt Statistics Lan Delay 0 Override Interval 0 Query Interval secs 30 Message Interval secs 60 BSR Candidate Preference 1 LAN Prune Delay Disable Add Reset Select face Addr Type Compla DR Priority Hellohold time Lan Delay Override IntlQuery IntMessage Int
277. the mask for the specified IP Address 7 110 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware IP Route Figure 7 97 IP Route Configuration Page IP Route Configuration Clicking the IP ROUTE tab brings up the IP ROUTE CONFIGURATION page Figure 7 97 which allows you to configure the static IP routes The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 72 Table 7 72 IP Route Configuration Page Parameters This parameter specifies the network address for which the route is being Destination Network added Gateway This parameter denotes the Next Hop Gateway to reach the IP address Distance Metric This parameter specifies the metric value of the destination 7 111 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual LoopBack Basic Settings Figure 7 98 LoopBack Basic Settings Page LoopBack Basic Settings Clicking the LOOPBACK SETTINGS tab brings up the LOOPBACK BASIC SETTINGS page Figure 7 98 which allows you to configure loopback IP interfaces The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 73 Table 7 73 LoopBack Basic Settings Page Parameters LoopBack Interface This parameter is the name of the loopback interface getting created Interface Status This parameter for the INTERFACE STATUS can be set to Up or Down Subnet Mask This parameter specifies the subnet mask for this loopback interface 7 112 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware IP V6 The IPV6 li
278. tics Figure 7 183 MSTP MSTI Port Statistics Page SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM X2C SMIS Home gt System Mgmt gt Layer2 Mgmt gt Layer3 Mgmt Refresh Support MSTI Port Statistics MSTP MSTI Port Statistics instance Port Designated Designated Designated State Forward ed Transmitted Invalid Root Bridge Port sit BPDUs BPDUs Received BPDUs Clicking the MSTI PORT STATISTICS tab brings up the MSTP MSTI PORT STATISTICS page Figure 7 183 which displays MSTP MSTI port level statistics The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 152 7 210 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Table 7 152 MSTP MSTI Port Statistics Page Parameters Instance Designated Root Designated Port Forward Transitions Transmitted BPDUs Designated Cost This parameter specifies the MSTP instance Identifer This parameter specifies the designated root bridge address This parameter specifies the index of designated port for this MSTP instance This parameter specifies the number of Forward Transitions This parameter specifies the number of BPDUs transmitted This parameter specifies the designated cost Link Aggregation LA The Link Aggregation link allows you to view Link Aggregation LA statistics through the following pages LA Port Statistics on page 7 212 LA Neighbor Statistics on page 7 213 7 211 Superblade Network Modules User s Ma
279. tifier as 1 2 and 3 are stacked together the links will be as follows Gi1 1 Ex1 2 Gi2 1 Ex2 2 Gi3 1 Ex3 2 So to view the ports of switch 2 you need to select the Gi2 1 Ex2 2 link Port Basic Settings Figure 7 55 Port Basic Settings Page Port Basic Settings Gi0 1 Ex0 3 Ter Yes Trend gt 1500 Enabled gt Ves s rora s 1500 Enabled Vos rond gt 1500 Enabled gt fena gt 1500 Enabled Vos Hybed gt 16338 Enabled gt Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Clicking the BASIC SETTINGS tab brings up the PoRT BASIC SETTINGS page Figure 7 55 which allows you to configure port status and mode information This page also helps configuring priority and MTU The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 38 Table 7 38 Port Basic Settings Page Parameters This displays the port number This parameter allows you to administratively configure the admin state as Admin State Up or Down By default all ports are switch ports for layer 2 switching To configure a witen Por port as a layer 3 routed port choose No This sets the MTU value The Minimum is 90 and Maximum is 16338 A port must be administrativly down in order to change the MTU Jumbo frames of up to 9216 bytes are supported on 1G links Jumbo frames of up to 16338 bytes are supported on 10G links 7 66 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Port Monitoring Figure
280. use this parameter to change the Snoop Fowarding Mode between MAC based and IP based This is a display for the Switch Start MAC address This is a display for the Configuration Restore Status This is a display for the Device Up Time This is a display for the HTTP Server Status This is a display for the HTTP Port Number This page also has a control to Reset To Factory Defaults This clears all switch configuration and local user accounts information This reset requires reboot of the switch WARNING Make sure to have all necessary configurations backed up before A doing Reset To Factory Defaults This page also provides a control to Reboot the switch In stacking the Switch Identifier is displayed on top of this reboot button You can select the interested stack member switch to reboot the corresponding switch You can also select the ALL option to reboot all stack members 7 10 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Sysiem Version Figure 7 8 System Version Page System Version Clicking the SYSTEM VERSION tab brings up the SYSTEM VERSION page Figure 7 8 This page displays the hardware and firmware version of the switch 7 11 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual File Management Figure 7 9 File Management Page Clicking the FILE MANAGEMENT link brings up the FILE MANAGEMENT page Figure 7 9 The FILE MANAGEMENT page helps you to manage the configuration files in the sw
281. ver from the bay you want to place the module in 2 Place the module s release handle in the open position 3 Slide the module into the module bay until it stops 4 Push the release handle to the closed position After the module has been installed and the handle locked it will power on after a short delay and a POST test will run to verify it is working properly Removing the Module 1 Pull out the release handle to the open position 2 Pull the module out of the bay 3 Replace immediately with another module or with a dummy module cover to maintain airflow integrity Installing Removing the InfiniBand Pass Through Module Before installing the InfiniBand pass through module make sure the cover to the module has been installed before proceeding Refer to the anti static precautions described in Chapter 2 The InifiniBand pass through module must be installed into a triple wide bay For instructions on how to create a triple wide bay see Appendix C Assuming that you have already created a triple wide bay out of three single wide bays continue with the steps below Installing the Module 1 Remove the dummy cover from the bay you want to place the module in 2 Place the module s release handle in the open position 3 Slide the module into the module bay until it stops 4 Push the release handle to the closed position Removing the Module 1 Pull out the release handle to the open position 2 Pull the module out of th
282. wn in Table 7 160 Table 7 160 IPV6 Interface Statistics Page Parameters Interface This parameter specifies the Port index This parameter specifies the number of IPv6 packets received with header Hdr Err Graf This parameter specifies the number of IPv6 packets received with Addr Eis address errors 7 221 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 160 IPV6 Interface Statistics Page Parameters Continued Unknown protos Delivers Out Discards Reasm Reqds Reasm Fails Frag Fails Revd Mcast Pkts Trunctd Pkts This parameter specifies the number of packets received with unknown protocol This parameter specifies the number of packets delivered This parameter specifies the number of transmit discards due to errors This parameter specifies the number of reassembly requests This parameter specifies the number of reassemblies failed This parameter specifies the number of fragments incompletely received This parameter specifies the number of received IPv6 multicast packets This parameter specifies the number of packets truncated 7 222 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware ICMP V6 Statistics SUPERMICR SWITCH SBM GEM X2C SMIS Clicking the ICMPV6 tab brings up the ICMPV6 STATISTICS page Figure 7 192 ICMPv 6 Statistics Page Refresh Support Help About Log Out lt a ICMPv6 Statistics In Message 0 In
283. xternal Ports Description Internal Fourteen 1 Gbps downlink ports External fourteen 1 Gbps RJ45 uplink ports Remote Management NA Protocols NA Power Consumption 30 6W 5 4 SBM XEM 002 SBM XEM 002M 10 Gb Ethernet Pass through Module The SBM XEM 002 and the newer SBM XEMO 002M 10 Gigabit pass through modules are non configurable pass through modules that includes 14 fourteen 10 Gb s uplink SFP ports and 14 10 Gb s internal downlink XAUI ports for the SuperBlade s LAN interfaces The SBM XEM 002M 10 Gigabit pass through module includes connectors and circuitry that allow the installation of an optional mini CMM module BMB CMM 002 See the SuperBlade User s Manual for information on the installation and operation of the mini CMM module The RJ45 connector is used for console connection to the mini CMM module The SBM XEM 002 10 Gigabit pass through module must be installed in a double wide slot in the enclosure It is installed in a location that is alternately used for the InfiniBand switch module See the SuperBlade User s Manual for details NOTE For any blade to access the 10 Gigabit pass through module it must first have one of the Connect X based add on InfiniBand cards installed on its f mainboard AOC IBH XDS or AOC IBH XDD AOC IBH XDS AOC IBH XDD or AOC IBH XDS or AOC IBH XDD cards See Appendix A for details on the AOC cards Unlike the SBM GEM 001 or SBM GEM X2C Ethernet switch modules th
284. y the switch identifier of the Slave switch This parameter is used to specify the MAC address of the Slave switch Stack MAC This MAC address is used to communicate between stack member switches Card Name This parameter is used to specify the type of Slave switch Stack Link Status Figure 7 50 Stack Link Status Page SWITCH 1 LED STATUS Stack Link Status The STACK LINK STATUS page Figure 7 50 displays the stack interface link status as up or down 7 60 Chapter 7 1 10 Gb Ethernet Switch Firmware Stack Counters Figure 7 51 Stack Counter Details Page Stack Counters Clicking the STACK COUNTERS tab brings up the STACK COUNTERS DETAILS page Figure 7 51 which displays statistics for stacking ports The parameters for this page are shown in Table 7 37 Table 7 37 Stack Counter Details Page Parameters Port This parameter displays the stacking port identifier InOctet This parameter displays the number of bytes received This parameter displays the number of received packets which were InDiscard discarded InHCOctet This parameter displays the number of bytes received with HC OutOctet This parameter displays the number of bytes transmitted OutDiscard This parameter displays the number of packets discarded in transmission 7 61 Superblade Network Modules User s Manual Table 7 37 Stack Counter Details Page Parameters Continued OutH

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Standard du Commerce Équitable Fairtrade les herbes et les tisanes  GM-D8604 - Pioneer Electronics  本 社 大阪事業所 名古屋支社 木し 幌 支 店 仙 台 支 店  Manuale dell`utente    FICHA DATOS TÉCNICOS AR C.C. 30%  USER`S MANUAL  Engineering Technical Bulletin - Australian Industrial Truck  Télécharger  Manitowoc Ice 1480279 User's Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file